JP2017093523A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a pachinko machine implementing further novel game properties in the game machine adopting a concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to a player.SOLUTION: When game balls are shot toward a special symbol operation-start hole at prescribed intervals and a game state is a special symbol time-shortening first state, the pachinko machine is so configured that an expectation value related to the number of prize balls to be assigned to a player by execution of a small winning game per unit hour becomes smaller than the number of shot game balls per unit hour, however, when it is a special symbol time-shortening second state under the same condition, the expectation value related to the number of prize balls to be assigned to the player by execution of the small winning game per unit hour becomes larger than the number of shot game balls per unit hour.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 93

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  As a recent pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is pachinko gaming machines that transition to the state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this manner, there is a probability-changing gaming state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and a time-reducing gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states.

JP 2005-31274 A JP 2011-45518 JP 2008-167875 A

  However, since there are many such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that can realize further innovative gaming properties.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state. A game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured so that the game ball is not able to enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) displays the first main game identification information in a variable manner, First main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop displaying the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the second main game identification information. Two-main game identification information display control means;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, to the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20). A plurality of unit games in which the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) can be made advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls or until a predetermined period elapses. The special game to be executed can be executed, and after the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening) C10, second grand prize opening C20) until there is a specific number of balls or until a specific period elapses, the variable prize opening (eg, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) is given to the player. One unit game that can be advantageous It is capable of executing the variable winning opening open game executing the special game control means,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) side to the sub game unit side;
Even if the first main game identification information is variably displayed, the variable display of the second main game identification information can be started. Even if the second main game identification information is variably displayed, the first main game identification information It is configured to start variable display,
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Alternatively, the first main game identification information cannot be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second main game identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. ,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
The fluctuation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state is the fluctuation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state. Is configured to be relatively long,
The variation display period of the second main game identification information in the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state is the variation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state. Is configured to be relatively long,
When a game ball is fired at a predetermined interval toward the second starting port, it is a normal game state and a high-probability lottery state, rather than a specific game state and a high-probability lottery state. Is configured to increase the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the variable prize opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed,
When a game ball is fired at a predetermined interval toward the second starting port, it is a normal game state and a high probability lottery state, rather than a normal game state and a low probability lottery state. Is configured to increase the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the variable prize opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed,
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
Based on the information about the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information received by the game information receiving means, with the effect display content control means capable of displaying the sub game identification information on the effect display unit,
In the case of the normal game state and the low probability lottery state, when the information about the first main game identification information is received, the secondary game identification information based on the information about the first main game identification information is displayed in the effect display unit. On the other hand, in the case of the normal game state and the low probability lottery state, if information related to the second main game identification information is received, the secondary game identification based on the information related to the second main game identification information A pachinko gaming machine that is configured to display information in a display mode in which information is not displayed on the effect display unit or is more difficult to view than sub game identification information based on information related to the first main game identification information. .

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in the gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is an effect content determination table configuration diagram on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the end demonstration time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of an end demonstration time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating the opening pattern of the big winning opening on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the start demonstration time control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a start demonstration effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is an operation diagram relating to the second grand prize opening C20 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the lower shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entrance determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of a V winning detection effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the small hit game related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is an operational diagram relating to winning in the V winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of limited frequency end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 85 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 92 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of a small hitting related short time end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the small hitting related short time end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a table related to external terminal transmission contents on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a table relating to external terminal transmission contents on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 105 shows an example of an electric-powered article opening time applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 106 is an example of a case where a small hit is won in the final variation of the time-saving gaming state applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 107 shows an example of a notice effect applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.). The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main control board. The “decoration pattern (design)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. “Displaying identification information” is not limited to a display method. For example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only whether light is emitted but also a color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction” refers to display content that enhances the fun of the game. For example, identification information fluctuates / stops, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “Estimated average execution time of easy-to-play games per unit time” is assumed to be a situation in which there is a constant change in the auxiliary game symbol (for example, there is always a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the start port. In terms of internal processing, in other words, for example, When a variable member is attached to the start port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function activated / non-actuated state), the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member is won High or low probability (so-called ordinary figure high-probability lottery state / low-probability lottery state), normal pattern (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of variable members Condensation function inoperative state, operating state) is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the variation display period of identification information” is not limited to the meaning of measuring the variation display period for each variation display of identification information and taking the average value based on the actual measurement value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are multiple types of variable display periods to be determined (selected), , The expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (the sum of “selection probability × variable display period”). If there is one type of variable display period to be selected, one type The variable display period itself is (that is, includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of loss, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variable display period with the highest selection probability In other words, it is possible to supplement the fact that the meaning of this wording is to be used as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that can be experienced by the player. As a method of realizing different "average values", the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are changed, or even if the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are the same, a further variable display period is added. There are various methods such as changing the period value when doing this, but it is not limited to any method). “The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is different from the first period. "At least having a variable period state" means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states) For example, the state transition of “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” is made according to the number of times of display of the identification information. Including those that can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the variation display period of the identification information in each state is configured as “first variation period state” <“second variation period state” <“third variation period state”, It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state {Of course, the reverse state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it becomes suitable when used in combination with the probability variation gaming state that continues until the next jackpot + electric-chu specific gaming state (the next jackpot is not obtained despite the situation where the next jackpot occurrence is definite) As the situation continues, the speed of progress of the game increases, so there is a case where it is possible to dispel the feeling of fatigue during so-called humming. Further, as a feature of each state, in the “first variation period state”, the difference between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is “ In the “third variation period state”, which is smaller than the difference in the “second variation period state”, the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of losing and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hitting In addition to the difference being smaller than that in the “second variation period state”, the identification information variation display period is likely to be relatively long compared to the “first variation period state” (particularly in the event of a loss) In other words, in the “second variation period state”, the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is relatively long compared to other states. (I.e., the fluctuation display period for short fluctuations where the loss is definitive and the fluctuation display period for medium fluctuations suggesting a hit are not selected (or difficult to select), but the fluctuations in reach fluctuations (per long fluctuation) It can be exemplified that it has a feature that only the display period is selected (or is easily selected)}. The “specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game” may be a period from immediately after the end of the execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made. It may be a period from the time when one or more symbol changes are made after the execution of the game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made (that is, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed) If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within the range, so the aforementioned “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” The specific period may mean the stay period of the “first variation period state” and / or the “second variation period state”. “When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold” means, for example, that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called big hit game) will occur at the time of the hold-up, but there is a possibility that a special game will occur There are no particular limitations on the criteria. More specifically, “winning random number (random number for success / failure lottery)”, “variation mode determination random number” for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, “symbol determination random number” for determining the stop symbol, Random values such as “hit symbol determination random numbers” that determine whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game may be used as a criterion for judgment, and event contents derived from these random values (results of success / failure determination) The length of the variation time, the type of stop symbol, whether or not to shift to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment criteria. “Suggesting or notifying the presence of a hold” means, for example, an effect at the time of the on-hold digestion until reaching the hold (a design variation mode of a decorative design, or in conjunction with it) In the case of notification, for example, a display mode of a holding indicator lamp (which may be an image on a liquid crystal display device) at the time of occurrence of the holding Is changed (in that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the sound such as the on-hold sound or BGM is changed at the time of the on-hold occurrence, and the effect lamp at the time of the on-hold occurrence Changing the lighting mode of the (frame lamp, etc.), or executing mode of other effects (decoration pattern of the decorative pattern, background effects, etc. performed in conjunction with it) executed at the time of the hold occurrence The To reduction, and the like.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. In addition, in this example, “table” is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that this is an associated mode. Furthermore, numerical values (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.) as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications are as follows: This is merely an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, according to the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, by the time shortening game and non- It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in the conditions for time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of the lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is as follows: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be changed as appropriate so that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side, etc. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring based on the intention that the probability variation gaming state will continue until the next jackpot occurs, whether to set “65535” as the number of continuations (configure to continue substantially), Or, even in the options of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples Should be understood as appropriate.

  Here, the structure applicable to the pachinko game which concerns on this example is shown in FIG.1 and FIG.2. Further, the following concepts can be extracted (listed) from the configurations shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the embodiments described later are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (upper level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be. Note that the time-reduced gaming state according to this example may be that the main game short time flag is on, or the auxiliary game short time flag may be on, that is, the time shortened gaming state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is activated, or the non-time-reduced gaming state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not activated.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to enter a specific area C22 during a big hit to shift to a probability-variable gaming state after the big hit (also referred to as a ball game machine), and a concept based on the configuration as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (1)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20),
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on a ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10);
A success / failure determination means for executing a determination of success / failure based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the determination of correctness by the correctness determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20), control is performed to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information. Identification information display control means;
A special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination of success / failure by the determination unit for winning / failing is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group Special game control means to be executed;
Control that has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main gaming starting port A10) than the normal gaming state, and is set to the specific gaming state after completion of execution of the special game A gaming state transition control means capable of,
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group,
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
When one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed In, it is configured so that the execution contents of the special game are different from each other,
During the execution of the special game, there is a predetermined number of balls in the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) or until the predetermined time elapses (for example, the first big winning opening C10). ) Can be executed in a state advantageous to the player,
The ease of entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be higher than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in a unit game in a corresponding special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the symbol variation on the second main game side is more advantageous for the player than the symbol variation on the first main game side, and as a concept based on this configuration, ,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (2)
It depends on the number of prize balls that a player can acquire by a special game when the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information is specific stop identification information belonging to a specific group The expected value is obtained by the player through a special game when the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be relatively larger than an expected value related to the number of winning balls.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the second main game side hold is prioritized over the first main game side hold, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (3)
When the second hold exists, the first success / failure determination permission condition is not satisfied, while the second success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied regardless of whether or not the first hold exists. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured such that the big hit on the second main game side is easier to hit the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round than the big hit on the first main game side. As a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (4)
In the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the determination of success / failure by the first success / failure determination means is winning. The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is relatively stopped and displayed more easily than when the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that even if it is a big hit relating to the same big hit symbol, the variation mode determination table referred to after the big hit is different depending on whether or not the specific area C22 is entered during the big hit. As a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (5)
The first variation pattern table as a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, and the second variation pattern table having a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the second identification information from the first variation pattern table And after the execution of the special game, the first variation period state referring to the first variation pattern table and the second variation period state referring to the second variation pattern table may be controlled. Variable period state control means,
In the case of a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, if a specific area is entered, the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variable period While state
If there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game and the second variable period It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be in a state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the selection tendency of the variation mode determination table to be referred to after the big hit is different even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit symbol depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22 As a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (6)
As a table to be referenced when determining the variation display time of the identification information, there is at least a first variation pattern table, and the first variation pattern table has at least a second variation pattern table having a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information. Then, after the execution of the special game, the variable period state control that can be controlled to be either the first variable period state referring to the first variable pattern table or the second variable period state referring to the second variable pattern table Means and
In the case of a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, if a specific area is entered, the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variable period While state
If there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game and the second variable period Configured to be in a state,
As a table that is referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information, the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table further include a third variation pattern table in which the selection trend of the variation display time of the identification information is different,
The unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is a unit, and if there is a ball entering a specific area in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the special After the execution of the game has been completed and the one unit has been performed a predetermined number of times, the first variation period state referring to the first variation pattern table is changed to the third variation period state referring to the third variation pattern table. This is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured as described above.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit is different even if the big hit is related to the same big hit symbol depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22. Well, as a concept based on the structure,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (7)
Whether or not to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is determined according to the presence or absence of entering the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit symbol, the direction tendency after the big hit is different depending on whether or not the specific area C22 is entered. Is a stage that depends on controlling the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect that is displayed when the stay stage is different (the type of the notice effect that can be executed, the background effect that can be executed) The type, the execution frequency of the notice effect that can be executed, the execution frequency of the background effect that can be executed, etc.) are different. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (8)
As the production mode that depends on controlling the production display content to be displayed on the production display unit, the first production mode and the first production mode have a second production mode with different production display contents,
In the case of a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, when a specific area is entered, the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game and the first effect mode is set. While
In a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, when there is no entry into the specific area, the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game and the second effect mode is set. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to rush into the time-reduced gaming state after the big hit, regardless of whether or not the specific area C22 is entered. As a concept based on composition,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (9)
Regardless of whether or not a specific game has entered a specific area corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, it is definite that the specific game state will be entered after the execution of the special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that the number of times after the big hit differs depending on whether the specific area C22 is entered, even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit design. as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (10)
When the special game state is reached after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of change display to the stop display of the first identification information or the second identification information,
In the case of a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, if there is a ball entering a specific area, the one unit will be executed for the first number of times after the execution of the special game. It is configured to maintain a specific gaming state until
If there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the one unit is executed a second number of times after the execution of the special game. It is configured to maintain a specific gaming state until
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the first number of times is greater than the second number of times.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the tendency of the variation time in the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state differs depending on whether or not the player enters the specific area (for example, before the final variation, the shortest variation time at the time of losing Although the same, but the final variation, the shortest variation time at the time of loss may be different), as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (11)
If there is a ball entering a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, in the final round of the specific game state after the execution of the special game, The average value of the variable identification display period of the second identification information when the result of the determination of success / failure by the second success / failure determination means is non-winning is configured to be an average value A,
In the last round of the specific game state after the end of the execution of the special game, when there is no entry to the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, The average value of the variable display period of the second identification information when the result of the determination of success / failure by the second success / failure determination means is not won is an average value B that is different from the average value A. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the content of the effect in the final variation of the time-saving gaming state is different depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (12)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit;
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state compared to the normal gaming state,
It is configured so that it can be controlled to enter the normal gaming state after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number when the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number when the number of repetitions of the unit is a specific gaming state. ,
It is configured to be in a specific gaming state after the end of the special game,
In the case of a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, if there is a ball entering a specific area, an effect display in the last round of the specific game state after the execution of the special game The content is configured to be production display content A,
When there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the effect display in the last round of the specific game state after the execution of the special game The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the content is an effect display content B that is an effect display content different from the effect display content A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is in a limited frequency state for a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction gaming state in the gaming machine that enters the specific area C22 during the big hit and shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit. {Does not select a variation time longer than a predetermined time (for example, variation time corresponding to symbol variation in which pseudo continuous variation as a candidate for variation time is executed) (pseudo continuous variation is a decorative symbol in one symbol variation) The temporary stop display is executed a plurality of times, and it is a variation that makes it appear as if the player has performed a plurality of symbol variations)}, and as a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (13)
Regardless of whether or not a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered in a unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the normal game state is normally set after the execution of the special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the change display time of the identification information does not exceed a specific time until the one unit is performed a specific number of times from when the game state is entered.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example shifts to the limited frequency state after the time reduction gaming state that rushes after the big hit in the big hit related to the same big hit symbol, regardless of whether or not to enter the specific area C22 (the limitation If you hit a big hit in the frequency state, it may be considered as a continuation of the resort.
Pachinko machines related to this concept (14)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state compared to the normal gaming state,
It is configured so that it can be controlled to be in a normal gaming state after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number when the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number in the case of a specific gaming state from the start to the stop display of the identification information. And
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period And at least a period state,
At the time of execution of a special game, regardless of whether or not a specific area is entered, it is configured to be in a specific game state after the execution of the special game,
When the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number after entering the specific gaming state, the normal gaming state and the first variation period state are configured.
It can be controlled to set the second variable period state after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number in the first variable period state when the identification information variable display start to stop display is one unit. This is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured as described above.

Even if the pachinko gaming machine according to this example enters the specific area C22 with a big hit according to the same big hit symbol, the start demonstration time and / or the end demonstration time differ depending on the gaming state at the big hit (start The output mode of the external terminal signal related to the demo time and / or the external terminal signal related to the end demo time may be different. In the case of a short open big hit, the end demo time may be the same regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, or the difference in the end demo time may be relatively small. Is
Pachinko machines related to this concept (15)
Entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game executed by the identification information being stopped and displayed with the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the normal game state If there is a ball, the special game end demo period corresponding to the special game is configured as the first period,
Entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game executed by the identification information being stopped and displayed with the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific game state If there is a ball, the special game end demo period corresponding to the special game is configured to be the second period,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the first period is longer than the second period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the end demo time value is different (the start demo time value is unchanged) even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit symbol, depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22. Well, as a concept based on the structure,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (16)
Demonstration of the end of a special game when there is a ball entering a specific area and when there is no ball entering a specific area in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group The pachinko gaming machine is characterized by being configured to have different periods.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that the content of the end demonstration effect is different (the start demonstration effect is unchanged) even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit symbol, depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22. Well, as a concept based on the structure,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (17)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
As the state relating to the game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more profitable than the normal game state,
At the time of execution of a certain special game, the contents displayed in the special game end demo period (for example, the second embodiment) when there is a ball entering the specific area and when there is no ball entering the specific area The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the special game end demonstration time in the modified example 1 is different from the consecutive villa continuous image and the consecutive villa end image).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a first main game length opening big hit (a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the first main game side) and a second main game length opening big hit (first The tendency of the start demonstration effect differs depending on the big game that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the two main games side. For example, in the first main game length opening big hit, “long opening confirmation notification effect (indication that the second big prize opening C20 is long open in the special game being executed)” and “long opening presence / non-notification effect ( 2) can be displayed in the special game that is being executed. The second main game long opening big hit is “definite long opening determined”. Only one type of “notification effect” can be displayed, that is, the display selection rate of “long release confirmation notification effect” may be different). As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (18)
As the effect display contents performed in the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) during the start demonstration period of the special game, it has plural kinds of effect display contents,
In a special game start demonstration period corresponding to a special game in a case where the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information is specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group The tendency of the effect display contents performed in the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) and the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means are winning, and the stop identification information of the second identification information is first specified. It is configured so that the tendency of the effect display content performed in the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) in the special game start demonstration period corresponding to the special game in the case of the specific stop identification information belonging to the group is different. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, it is difficult to enter a long open big hit (a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round) and a short open big hit (a specific game C22 in the distribution game execution round). It may be configured so that the output mode of the external terminal signal at the time of entering the specific area C22 is different, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (19)
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
As a special game, it has at least an easy-to-enter special game and a difficult-to-enter special game that is difficult to enter a specific area during execution of a special game, rather than an easy-to-enter special game,
As external output information to output from pachinko machines to the outside, it is configured to be able to output first information and second information different from the first information,
The first information and the second information are configured to be output when triggered by entering a specific area during execution of a special game,
The first information is configured to be output when a specific area is entered during execution of the easy-to-enter special game,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured to output the second information when a specific area is entered during execution of a special game difficult to enter.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has a shielding member (open state and closed state) according to the jackpot symbol, and it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area C22 in the open state and specific in the closed state. The release mode of the member that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the region C22 is different (there is a timing at which the game is released at least once and is open regardless of the jackpot symbol, and the specific region from the start timing of the distributed game execution round The time until the opening start timing and the time from the distribution game execution round end timing to the specific area closing timing may be configured such that the former is shorter in intervals, etc., and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (20)
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A displaceable member provided in the variable winning opening, wherein the variable variable member is displaced to an inhibition position that inhibits entry into the specific area and an uninhibited position that does not inhibit entry into the specific area; With
As a special game, it has at least a first special game and a second special game different from the first special game,
A pachinko characterized in that a displacement mode of the distribution variable member (for example, the lower shielding member C25) during execution of the first special game is different from a displacement mode of the distribution variable member during the execution of the second special game. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that the count number or the number of prize balls is different depending on the big prize opening. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (21)
A first variable winning opening that can be in an open state and a closed state;
It has a second variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state,
When the result of the determination is a win, the first variable winning opening and / or the second variable winning opening is configured to execute a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous for the player until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses in the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in a state multiple times,
The predetermined number at which the unit game related to the first variable prize opening ends is different from the predetermined number at which the unit game related to the second variable prize opening ends, or the first variable prize opening Number of winning balls when entering the ball (for example, 15 balls as the number of winning balls of the first major winning port in the first modification from the second embodiment) and the number of winning balls when entering the second variable winning port The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be different from (for example, 13 balls which are the number of winning balls of the second big prize opening in Modification 1 from the second embodiment).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to always continue round until the distribution game execution round, regardless of the big hit, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (22)
A first variable winning opening that can be in an open state and a closed state;
A second variable winning opening that can be in an open state and a closed state;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the second variable prize opening can enter,
When the result of the determination is a win, the first variable winning opening and / or the second variable winning opening is configured to execute a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous for the player until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses in the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in a state multiple times,
As a special game, at least a first special game and a first special game have at least a second special game in which the number of unit games executed is different,
In the unit game of the predetermined number of times in the special game (for example, the 4R which becomes the distribution game execution round), the second variable prize opening is configured to be opened,
In any of the first special game and the second special game, the pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the number of unit games to be executed is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the time from the end of the round immediately before the distribution game execution round to the start of the distribution game execution round is different between the first main game length opening big hit and the second main game length opening big hit. You may comprise so that the tendency of the closing time of the big prize opening between predetermined rounds may differ. In addition, a promotion effect (an effect indicating whether the current big hit is a long open big hit or a short open big hit) may be executed in a round before the distribution game execution round, and a concept based on the configuration as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (23)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A first variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state;
A second variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the second variable prize opening can enter,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
When the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, Or a special game control means for executing a special game that can make the second variable prize opening advantageous to the player,
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination is a winning game, a first easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning, a second easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous for the player until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses in the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in a state multiple times,
In the unit game of the predetermined number of times in the special game, the second variable prize opening is configured to be opened,
From the timing when the last first variable winning award or the second variable winning award in the unit game immediately before the predetermined number of unit games is changed from the open state to the closed state, the first second in the predetermined number of unit games. The predetermined unit game preparation period in the first easy-to-enter special game and the predetermined unit game in the second easy-to-enter special game when the variable winning opening is from the closed state to the open state as the predetermined unit game preparation period. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the time value differs from the preparation period.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the first main game length release big hit (the big win that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the first main game side) is the second main game length release. It may be configured so that there are more rounds that are shorter open than the big hit (big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round on the second main game side). As a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (24)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A first variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state;
A second variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the second variable prize opening can enter,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
When the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, Or a special game control means for executing a special game that can make the second variable prize opening advantageous to the player,
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination is a winning game, a first easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning, a second easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous for the player until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses in the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in a state multiple times,
In the unit game of the predetermined number of times in the special game, the second variable prize opening is configured to be opened,
From the timing when the last first variable winning award or the second variable winning award in the unit game immediately before the predetermined number of unit games is changed from the open state to the closed state, the first second in the predetermined number of unit games. Easy first entry when the variable winning opening is from the closed state to the open state as a predetermined unit game preparation period (for example, the distribution game start demonstration time in the modified example 2 from the second embodiment) The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined unit game preparation period in the special game and the predetermined unit game preparation period in the second easy-to-enter special game are configured to have different time values.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the average value of the number of execution rounds is the same for the first main game side jackpot and the second main game side jackpot, and as a concept based on the configuration, ,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (25)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
It has a variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section. Prepared,
If the result of the first win / fail determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit, a first special game is executed that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player. It is configured as
If the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit, a second special game is executed that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player. It is configured as
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
As the first special game, there are multiple types of special games with different number of unit games to be executed,
As the second special game, there are multiple types of special games with different number of unit games to be executed,
The average number of unit games executed in a plurality of types of first special games and the average number of unit games executed in a plurality of types of second special games are configured to be the same. This is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example performs a promotion effect in the first main game length opening jackpot in the non-stochastic variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, while the second main player in the probability-changing gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state. The promotion effect is not executed in the game head opening big hit. Further, in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the first main game length opening jackpot may be configured not to execute the promotion effect, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (26)
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect indicating the ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22)
In the normal gaming state and the low-probability lottery state, the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is won, and the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed with the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group When the special game is executed, the specific effect is executed during the execution of the special game,
In the case of a specific gaming state and a high-probability lottery state, the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is won, and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group Thus, when the special game is executed, the pachinko gaming machine is configured not to execute the specific effect during the execution of the special game.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, during the jackpot execution, the on-hold consecutive villa production in which there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold is performed during the distribution game execution round or after the distribution game execution round (specific area C22 (It is a condition to enter the ball), and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (27)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the start opening;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquiring means, the random number temporarily storing means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and controlling the hold to occur,
Control that the identification information is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit in accordance with the determination content based on the random number related to the certain hold when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied Identification information display control means,
With
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect that is an effect suggesting the feasibility of a special game related to a certain hold,
In the case of the pachinko gaming machine, when the reserved pre-reading effect is executed during the special game, the reserved pre-reading effect is executed at a timing after entering the specific area.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the first main game length opening big hit (the big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distributed game execution round on the first main game side) (to the specific area C22) Game ball launch = production to promote right-handed hitting) and second main game length opening big hit (a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distributed game execution round on the first main game side) The content of the presentation may be different (the V-targeting effect at the second main game length opening jackpot does not occur in the V-targeting effect at the first main game length opening jackpot), and as a concept based on the configuration Is
Pachinko machines related to this concept (28)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
With
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
At the time of execution of a special game, it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect that is an effect display content related to ease of entering a specific area,
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination is a winning game, a first easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning, a second easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
The effect mode of the specific effect executed during the execution of the first easy-to-enter special game is different from the effect mode of the specific effect executed during the execution of the second easy-to-enter special game. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has an ending effect {one or more of a predetermined condition (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of balls to be played at consecutive games, multiple types of specific effects are generated, etc. When a special game or an effect during a specific game that is displayed only when the condition of the combination is fulfilled}, an effect that prompts the player to make a right strike (for example, “Aim for V”) is displayed. It may be configured such that the production mode of the production is different (the display is less conspicuous than in other cases). As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (29)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
Based on the determination result, identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of identification information;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section,
A special game control means for executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display section when the result of the determination of success or failure is winning;
With
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
As the state relating to the game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more profitable than the normal game state,
It is configured to be able to measure the number of consecutive special games, which is the number of special games executed from the special game A to the special game B that is in the normal gaming state after the special game ends,
At the time of execution of a special game, it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect that is an effect display content related to ease of entering a specific area,
An effect mode of a specific effect during execution of the special game B in which the number of consecutive special games is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times and an effect mode of the specific effect during execution of the special game B in which the number of consecutive special games is less than the predetermined number of times It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured not to report the current number of rounds for at least a part of the first main game length opening jackpot, but to notify the current number of rounds for the second main game length opening jackpot. As a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (30)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section. Prepared,
If the result of the first win / fail determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit, a first special game is executed that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player. It is configured as
If the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit, a second special game is executed that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player. It is configured as
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination is a winning game, a first easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning, a second easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
While there is a unit game that does not notify the number of unit games being executed during the execution of the first easy-to-enter game, the number of unit games that are being executed is notified during the execution of the second easy-to-enter special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured so that there is no unit game that does not exist.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to be a gaming machine that can execute a parallel lottery and is a first type and first type compound machine. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (31)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
It has a variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section. Prepared,
Even if the first main game identification information is variably displayed, the variable display of the second main game identification information can be started. Even if the second main game identification information is variably displayed, the first main game identification information The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be able to start a variable display.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the special figure 2 small hit ratio is higher than the special figure 1 small hit ratio (special figure 1 may be mounted with small hits or may not be mounted), As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (32)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to an open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance and be compared with a closed state A variable member that is easy to enter and configured so that a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in a predetermined entrance when it is displaced to a closed state,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit variably displays the first main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the first main game identification information. One main game identification information display control means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the second main game identification information. Two-main game identification information display control means;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is variable until there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening or until a predetermined period elapses. A special game in which a unit game that can make a winning opening advantageous to a player can be executed a plurality of times can be executed, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group After being displayed, a variable prize opening opening game that executes a unit game that can make the variable prize opening advantageous to the player once until there is a specific number of balls in the variable prize opening or a specific period elapses. A special game control means that is executable;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side,
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Alternatively, the first main game identification information cannot be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second main game identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by that.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the variation time of the second main game symbol in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state is relatively short. ,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (33)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
With
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
The fluctuation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state is the fluctuation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state. Is configured to be relatively long,
The variation display period of the second main game identification information in the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state is the variation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have a relatively long time.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has at least a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, a non-probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, and a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state as gaming states. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (34)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
With
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
A pachinko game characterized in that, as a combination of gaming states, at least a normal gaming state and a low probability lottery state, a high probability lottery state, a normal gaming state, a specific gaming state and a high probability lottery state exist. Machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the expected value or base value per unit time when the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state continue to fire the game ball (except during the big hit) is the most advantageous As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (35)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
With
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
The expected value of the number of prize balls when the game ball is continuously fired in a situation where the special game is not being executed is the high probability lottery state and the normal game state when the game ball is in the high probability lottery state and the normal game state It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be relatively higher than the case of not.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the variation time of the second main game symbol other than the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state is relatively long, and a concept based on the configuration as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (36)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
With
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
The variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state is relatively more than the variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and not the high probability lottery state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be short.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the difference in the variation time of the first main game symbol and the difference in the variation time of the second main game symbol caused by the difference in the game state is the variation time of the second main game symbol. It may be configured so that the difference between is larger, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (37)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
With
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
The average value of the variation display period of the second identification information when the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, and the average value of the variation display period of the second identification information when the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state, The average value of the variation display period of the second identification information when the specific gaming state and the low probability lottery state, the average value of the variation display period of the second identification information when the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state, And the difference between the average value for the longest time and the average value for the shortest time is the second variable display period difference value (non-stochastic variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state of the second main gaming symbol) The average value of the variation time, the average value of the variation time in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the average value of the variation time in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening In gaming state Average value takes by comparing the mean value of the variation time becomes longest and shortest time to become an average value and difference),
The average value of the variable display period of the first identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, and the average value of the variable display period of the first identification information in the normal game state and the high probability lottery state; An average value of the variable display period of the first identification information when the specific gaming state and the low probability lottery state, and an average value of the variable display period of the first identification information when the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state; And the difference between the average value for the longest time and the average value for the shortest time is the first variation display period difference value (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state of the first main gaming symbol) The average value of the variation time, the average value of the variation time in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the average value of the variation time in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening In gaming state Average value takes by comparing the mean value of the variation time becomes longest and shortest time to become an average value and difference),
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the second variation display period difference value is larger than the first variation display period difference value.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the time-saving gaming state can be ended by winning a small hit (the time-saving gaming state can be shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state). As a concept based on
Pachinko machines related to this concept (38)
A start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state. Thus, a game ball can easily enter or can enter a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start entrance B10), and when the ball is displaced in the closed state, it is predetermined as compared with the case where the game ball is displaced in the open state. A variable member (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the second main game start port B10,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or specific A variable prize opening opening game can be executed in which a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player is executed once until the period elapses. Special game control means,
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, the game state after the execution of the variable prize opening game is changed to the normal game state when the specific condition is satisfied. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example can end the time-saving gaming state only in a specific gaming state even if the same small hit symbol is won (for example, in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state) The time shortening gaming state can be terminated by a small hit, while the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state may be configured such that the time shortening gaming state is not terminated by a small hit, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (39)
A start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state. Thus, a game ball can easily enter or can enter a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start entrance B10), and when the ball is displaced in the closed state, it is predetermined as compared with the case where the game ball is displaced in the open state. A variable member (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the second main game start port B10,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or specific A variable prize opening opening game can be executed in which a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player is executed once until the period elapses. Special game control means,
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, the game state after the execution of the variable prize opening game is changed to the normal game state when the specific condition is satisfied. Configured,
In the case of a specific game state and a high-probability lottery state, when the variable prize-opening game is started, the normal game state and the high-probability lottery state can be entered after the execution of the variable prize-opening game is completed. Has been
In the case of a specific game state and a low-probability lottery state, when the variable prize-opening game is started, the normal game state and the low-probability lottery state are not set after the execution of the variable prize-opening game is completed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that whether or not the time-saving gaming state is ended depends on the winning small winning symbol, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (40)
A start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state. Thus, a game ball can easily enter or can enter a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start entrance B10), and when the ball is displaced in the closed state, it is predetermined as compared with the case where the game ball is displaced in the open state. A variable member (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the second main game start port B10,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the identification information;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) or specific A variable prize opening opening game can be executed in which a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player is executed once until the period elapses. Special game control means,
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), there are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, the game state after the execution of the variable prize opening game is changed to the normal game state when the specific condition is satisfied. Configured,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A among the stop display modes belonging to the specific group in the specific gaming state, the specific condition may be satisfied,
In the pachinko gaming machine, the identification information is configured not to satisfy the specific condition when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B among the stop display modes belonging to the specific group in the specific game state. is there.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may end the time-saving game state when winning the small hit symbol on the first main game side, while it takes time to win the small hit symbol on the second main game side. The abbreviated gaming state may be configured not to end, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (41)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
During the execution of the special game, a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. ,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
As a variable prize opening game, the first variable prize opening game that is executed when the result of the first identification information success / failure determination is won and the result of the second identification information success / failure determination is won And a second variable prize opening game to be executed on
In the case of the specific gaming state, when the first variable winning opening opening game is started to be executed, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state after the execution of the first variable winning opening opening game,
When the second variable prize opening opening game is started in the specific gaming state, it is configured not to enter the normal gaming state after the execution of the second variable prize opening opening game. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that, when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit, the big hit may be started after the small hit ends. as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (42)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
When the result of the determination is successful, it is configured to execute a special game or a variable prize opening opening game that can make the variable prize opening advantageous for the player,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
During execution of the variable prize opening game, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. Has been
When entering a specific area (for example, V prize opening C27) during execution of the variable prize opening game, the special game is configured to be executed after the variable prize opening game is finished. It is a pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the distribution prize winning opening having the specific area C22 is opened on the 1R of the big hit. There may be one or two big winning mouths, and when there are two big winning mouths, one of the two big winning mouths may be configured not to have the specific area C22. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (43)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A first variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state;
A second variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the second variable prize opening can enter,
If the result of the determination is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display section, a special game is executed that can make the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening advantageous to the player. Special game control means to
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous for the player until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses in the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening. It is configured to execute the unit game to be in a state multiple times,
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the second variable winning opening is opened when the first unit game in the special game is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has a board configuration as follows.
Near the center of the board: 1st main game start opening Near the right side of the board face: (1) Auxiliary game start opening, (2) First main game start opening provided with an electric accessory, (3) Second main game start Mouth, (4) Grand Prize Exit (with specific area C22)
(It may be possible to provide a big prize opening that opens during small hits), and as a concept based on this configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (44)
The first main game start opening where game balls can enter,
A second main game start opening where game balls can enter,
A third main game start opening where game balls can enter,
Auxiliary game start opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the third main game start opening and displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the third main game start opening or compare with a closed state A variable member that is easy to enter and is configured so that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in the third main game start port when displaced to the closed state,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
With an auxiliary game part that supports the main game,
The main game department
A first main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a first main game random number based on a ball entering the first main game start port or the third main game start port;
First main game success / failure determination means for executing a first win / failure determination based on the first main game random number;
First main game identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first main game identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first main game identification information display content determination means, the first main game identification information display unit variably displays the first main game identification information and then controls to stop display the stop identification information. Game identification information display control means;
A second main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a second main game random number based on a ball entering the second main game start opening;
Second main game success / failure determination means for performing a second win / fail determination based on the second main game random number;
Second main game identification information display content determination means for determining second main game stop identification information of the second main game identification information based on the result of the second determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the second main game identification information display content determination means, the second main game identification information display unit controls the display of the stop identification information after the second main game identification information is variably displayed. Game identification information display control means;
If the result of the first win / fail decision or the second win / fail decision is a win, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first main game identification information display unit or the second main game first identification information display unit, and then variable. A special game control means for executing a special game that can make the winning opening advantageous to the player,
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port,
Auxiliary game identification information display content determination means for determining whether or not the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, by determining whether or not the auxiliary game random number acquisition means acquires the game based on the auxiliary game random number.
Based on the determination by the auxiliary game identification information display content determination means, the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display unit, and then the auxiliary game identification information display unit is stopped and displayed. Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to do,
If the determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the stop display mode of the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is moved within the displacement drive period, which is a period during which the variable member can be displaced. An easy-to-enter game determination execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that performs the operation of displacing the closed state one or more times after being displaced from the closed state to the open state;
As a flow down route where game balls flow down in the game area, it has a first flow down route and a second flow down route different from the first flow down route,
When game balls flow down the first flow down route, it is configured to flow down the vicinity of the first starting port,
When the game ball flows down the second flow down route, it is configured to flow down in the vicinity of the auxiliary game start port, the second start port, the third start port, and the variable winning port. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has the following specifications.
(1) It is a ball machine.
(2) The ratio of long open big hits is higher on the second main game side than on the first main game side.
(3) When the player enters the V winning opening with a long open big hit elected in the non-stochastic game state and the non-time shortened game state, the time shortened game state is entered after the big hit is over (or the ratio of becoming the time reduced game state) Is relatively high)
(4) If a long open jackpot is won in the probability variation gaming state, and the player enters the V winning opening during the jackpot, it does not shift to the time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot ends (or shifts to the time-reducing gaming state). hard)
(5) In the case of winning the small hit on the first main game side in the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the game shifts to the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state after the end of the small hit.
As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (45)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section. Prepared,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. It is configured to execute a special game or a variable prize opening game that can be in an advantageous state,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
During execution of the variable prize opening game, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. Has been
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination is a winning game, a first easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination is winning, a second easy-to-enter special game that is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have
A special game that is executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is winning, rather than a ratio that the special game executed when the result of the first success / failure determination is winning is the first easy-to-enter special game. Is configured so that the rate of becoming a second easy entry special game is higher,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
When entering a specific area during the execution of a special game, it is configured to be in a high probability lottery state after the end of the special game,
If you win the first easy-to-enter special game or the second easy-to-enter special game in the normal gaming state and the low-probability lottery state, and enter the specific area during the execution of the special game, It is configured to be in a specific gaming state after the game ends,
If you win the first easy-to-enter special game or the second easy-to-enter special game in the specific game state and the high probability lottery state, and enter the specific area during the execution of the special game, It is configured not to enter a specific gaming state after the game ends,
When the result of the first winning / failing determination is a win and a variable winning opening opening game is executed, the game is in a normal gaming state and a high probability lottery state after the variable winning opening releasing game is finished. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by that.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is “the expected value of the number of acquired game balls obtained by a small hit before the big hit ≦ the condition of the base 1 or more (the number of acquired game balls ≧ the number of launched game balls) in the small hit (probability variation game) In the state and in the non-time-saving game state), the largest winning game by the big hit. For example, if the small hit probability is 98/100 and the big hit probability is 2/100, the average hit is 49 times before the big hit. Therefore, it may be configured so that the expected value of the number of acquired game balls for 49 times per small portion does not exceed the maximum number of balls for one big hit in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (46)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
Based on the determination result, identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of identification information;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control unit for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display section, a special game or a variable prize opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. It is configured as
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
During execution of the variable prize opening game, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. Has been
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
Among the special games that can be won in the normal gaming state and the high-probability lottery state, the expected value of the number of prize balls is the highest in the normal game state and the high-probability lottery state. This is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured so that the expected value of the total number of winning balls in the variable winning opening opening game that can be won before winning a special game is smaller.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to maintain the main game probability change flag during small hits (leave on) while not maintaining during the big hits.
Pachinko machines related to this concept (47)
It has a start opening where game balls can enter,
When the result of the determination is successful, it is configured to execute a special game or a variable prize opening opening game that can make the variable prize opening advantageous for the player,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
During execution of the variable prize opening game, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. Has been
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
When a special game is executed in a situation with a high probability lottery state, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state during the execution of the special game,
When a variable prize opening game is executed in a high probability lottery state, the pachinko is configured to enter a high probability lottery state during the execution of the variable prize opening game. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured not to maintain the main game short flag during small hits (leave it on), but not during big hits.
Pachinko machines related to this concept (48)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the starting port and displaceable in an open state and a closed state. A variable member configured such that when the ball is displaced into the closed state, the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state;
When the result of the determination is successful, it is configured to execute a special game or a variable prize opening opening game that can make the variable prize opening advantageous for the player,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
During execution of the variable prize opening game, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. Has been
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
When a special game is executed in the situation of a specific game state, it is configured to be in a normal game state during the execution of the special game,
A pachinko gaming machine configured to be in a specific gaming state during execution of the variable prize opening opening game when a variable winning opening opening game is executed in a situation of a specific gaming state It is.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the “big hit signal”, which is an external terminal signal output during the small hit, depends on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit, Alternatively, it may be configured such that the period output during the small hit end demo time is different (for example, it is a relatively short time for a small hit won in the time-saving gaming state). As a concept based on
Pachinko machines related to this concept (49)
It has a start opening where game balls can enter,
If the result of the determination is a win, the game is configured to execute a variable prize opening game that can make the variable prize opening an advantageous state for the player,
As a gaming state, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is a gaming state that is more profitable than the normal gaming state,
It is configured to be able to output external output information (for example, an external terminal signal related to the small hit in the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment) for outputting from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside,
The external output information is configured to be output when the variable prize opening game is executed,
The output period of the external output information that is output when the variable prize opening game is executed in the normal gaming state, and the variable prize opening game is executed in the specific gaming state The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the output period of the external output information that is output when triggered by can be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the variation fixed time of the small hit symbol is different from the variable fixed time of a symbol other than the small hit symbol (for example, the lost symbol), and a concept based on the configuration as,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (50)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
Based on the determination result, identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of identification information;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control unit for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit,
The identification information is configured not to be variably displayed until a fixed fixed time elapses after a certain stop identification information is stopped and displayed.
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display section, a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. And
The variable fixed time related to the stop identification information that triggers execution of the variable prize opening game (for example, the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol) and the stop identification information that does not trigger the variable prize opening game to be executed The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the time value is different from the variable fixed time (for example, the variable fixed time related to the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol).

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that the fluctuation fixed time of the small hit symbol differs depending on whether the small hit symbol on the first main game side or the small hit symbol on the second main game side. As a concept based on
Pachinko machines related to this concept (51)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section. Prepared,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. It is configured to execute a special game or a variable prize opening game that can be in an advantageous state,
The first identification information and the second identification information are configured not to be variably displayed until a fixed fixed time elapses after a certain stop identification information is stopped and displayed.
When the result of the first or second determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display section, the variable winning opening that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player Configured to run games,
When the stop identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening game is the first identification information, the variable fixed time related to the stop identification information (for example, the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol on the first main game side) ) And variable fixed time related to the stop identification information when the stop identification information that triggers execution of the variable prize opening game is the second identification information (for example, the small winning symbol on the second main game side) The variable fixed time) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the time value is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that the variation fixed time of the small hit symbol can be different depending on the gaming state, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (52)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
Based on the determination result, identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of identification information;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control unit for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit,
The identification information is configured not to be variably displayed until a fixed fixed time elapses after a certain stop identification information is stopped and displayed.
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display section, a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. And
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
The variable fixed time related to the stop identification information that triggers execution of the variable prize opening game in the low probability lottery state and the stop identification information that triggers execution of the variable prize opening game in the high probability lottery state The pachinko gaming machine is configured to have a time value different from the variable fixed time.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to be able to output an external terminal signal corresponding to the variable fixed time, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (53)
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
Based on the determination result, identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of identification information;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control unit for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit,
The identification information is configured not to be variably displayed until a fixed fixed time elapses after a certain stop identification information is stopped and displayed.
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display section, a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. It is configured to be able to output external output information (for example, external terminal signal related to small hits) for output from the pachinko machine to the outside,
The external output information is a pachinko gaming machine that is configured to be output when a variable winning opening opening game is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has the following configuration in which a player in a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced gaming state is urged not to perform a right-handed strike and does not benefit even if a right-handed strike is performed. Configure as follows.
(1) The display of the decorative symbols on the second main game side is not executed.
(2) The opening time of the big winning opening at the second main game side at the small hit and big hit is shortened (the opening at the small hit is set as short opening, and the launch of the game ball is started simultaneously with the opening of the big winning opening. However, in the case of a big hit, the game ball will not reach the big prize opening at the timing when it can enter the specific area C22, It makes meaningless to aim at "big hit ⇒ probability variation gaming state".).
(3) The second main game symbol has a variation time of 0 to less than 10 minutes in a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a gaming state other than the time-reduction gaming state (the distribution is nearly equal) (right) When the player keeps hitting, the base is kept lower than the left-handed player, and the aim of raising the base by notifying the change of the second main game symbol in advance and entering the big winning opening is not performed).
(4) A delay route for delaying the flow of the game ball is provided on the right side of the board (the route that passes when the right-hand strike is executed).
As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (54)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A third start opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to the third starting port and displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the third starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the third starting port when it is displaced into the closed state, or incompatibility with the open state,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port or the third starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
With
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the information on the first identification information or the second identification information received by the game information receiving means, provided with the effect display content control means capable of displaying the sub-game identification information on the effect display unit,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
When the information about the first identification information is received, the secondary game identification information based on the first identification information is displayed on the effect display device, while when the information about the second identification information is received, the second identification information is displayed. It is configured not to display the secondary game identification information based on the effect display device,
When the result of the first success / failure determination is the winning period in the special game and the variable prize opening opening game executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is winning In a special game and a variable winning opening opening game, which are configured to be relatively shorter than the period in which the variable winning opening is in an open state,
When a game ball is fired after the result of the second winning / failing determination is elected and the variable winning opening opening game is started, the launched gaming ball is configured to be unable to enter the variable winning opening. ,
The variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and not the high probability lottery state is relative to the variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state. Is configured to be a long time,
A pachinko gaming machine configured to have a plurality of types of selection candidates for the variable display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and not in the high probability lottery state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured as one of the following as a countermeasure against fluctuations in the second main gaming symbol.
(1) If the first main game symbol wins a big hit or small hit when the first main game symbol is a big hit or small hit variation of the second main game symbol, and the first main game symbol is stopped, the second main game symbol is Display the lost symbol (forced stop).
Or
(2) If the first main game symbol is a big hit or small hit variation and the second main game symbol wins a big hit or small hit during the change, the first main game symbol will be stopped simultaneously with the stop of the second main game symbol Suspend fluctuations.
As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (55)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
It has a variable winning opening that can be closed and open,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
A first success / failure determination means for performing a first success / failure determination based on the first random number;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the first determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section,
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the second random number;
Second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the second determination.
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section,
If the result of the first win / fail determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display section or the second identification information display section, the variable prize opening is given to the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
With
The variable display start condition of the second identification information can be satisfied even if the first identification information is in the variable display, and the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied even if the second identification information is in the variable display. Configured to be possible,
If the stop identification information of the first identification information in which the result of the first success / failure is winning is stopped and displayed while the second identification information in which the result of the second success / failure is won is displayed in a variable manner, the second The pachinko gaming machine is configured to change the stop identification information of the identification information to the stop identification information of the second identification information in which the result of the second win / fail determination is unwinned and to stop display.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the auxiliary game winning probability is not 0 even in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, or in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state.
When a big hit is made in a non-stochastic game state and in a non-time-reduced game state, if the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the big hit starts, and if the auxiliary game symbol change is stopped and the auxiliary game is won after the big hit, The accessory opening time is a relatively short opening time.
When a big hit is made in a non-stochastic game state and in a non-time-reduced game state, the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the small hit is started, and the auxiliary game symbol change is stopped and the auxiliary game is won after the small hit is started. The electric accessory opening time is a relatively short opening time.
When winning a jackpot in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, if the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the big hit starts, and if the auxiliary game symbol change is stopped and the auxiliary game is won after the big hit starts, The opening time is a relatively short opening time.
When a big hit is made in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, if the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the small hit starts, and if the auxiliary game symbol change is stopped and the auxiliary game winning is selected after the small hit, The accessory opening time may be configured to be a relatively long opening time. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (56)
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state. A game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured so that the game ball is not able to enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening can enter;
A main game identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the main game identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering a main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
Based on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to display the display after variably displaying the main game identification information. Main game identification information display control means,
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20)? Or, it is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game can be executed a plurality of times so that the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) can be made advantageous to the player until a predetermined period elapses. After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). Or a variable prize opening opening game that executes a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player once until a specific period elapses. Special games that are feasible And a control means,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10),
A determination is made based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and the auxiliary game identification information display section (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to do,
When the result of determining whether or not the game is successful based on the auxiliary game random number is a winning period, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced. Within the displacement driving period, after the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the operation of displacing to the closed state is performed one or more times. Easy entry game determination execution means for executing easy entry game,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that is easy to open,
Under the situation where the result of determining whether or not the winning game is based on the auxiliary game random number and the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the normal game state. When the auxiliary game identification information that has been variably displayed during the execution of the special game is stopped and displayed, the variable member (e.g., in the easy-to-enter game based on the stop display) The period in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is in an open state is configured to be relatively short,
The main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the normal game state under the situation where the determination result of winning / failing based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed. When the variable prize opening opening game is executed, and the auxiliary game identification information that has been variably displayed during the execution of the variable prize opening opening game is stopped and displayed, the easy winning ball game based on the stop display is displayed. The variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is configured to be relatively short during the open state.
Under a situation where the winning / incoming determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group in a specific game state. When the auxiliary game identification information that has been variably displayed during the execution of the special game is stopped and displayed, the variable member (e.g., in the easy-to-enter game based on the stop display) The period in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is in an open state is configured to be relatively short,
Under the situation where the winning / incoming determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the specific game state. When the variable prize opening opening game is executed, and the auxiliary game identification information that has been variably displayed during the execution of the variable prize opening opening game is stopped and displayed, the easy winning ball game based on the stop display is displayed. Thus, the pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is in the open state is relatively long.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is small in the final variation (for example, the 100th rotation after the transition to the time shortening gaming state) of the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state or the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. If you win,
(1) When the winning symbol stops, the game is shifted to the non-stochastic game state.
Or
(2) After the small hit game ends, the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced game state are entered.
The concept based on the configuration may be as follows:
Pachinko machines related to this concept (57)
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state. A game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured so that the game ball is not able to enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening can enter;
A main game identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the main game identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering a main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
Based on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to display the display after variably displaying the main game identification information. Main game identification information display control means,
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20)? Or, it is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game can be executed a plurality of times so that the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) can be made advantageous to the player until a predetermined period elapses. After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). Or a variable prize opening opening game that executes a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player once until a specific period elapses. Special games that are feasible And a control means,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10),
A determination is made based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and the auxiliary game identification information display section (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to do,
When the result of determining whether or not the game is successful based on the auxiliary game random number is a winning period, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced. Within the displacement driving period, after the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the operation of displacing to the closed state is performed one or more times. Easy entry game determination execution means for executing easy entry game,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that is easy to open,
When entering a specific area during the execution of the variable prize opening game, the special game is configured to be executed after the variable prize opening game ends.
The main game identification information is configured so that it can be controlled from the start to the stop display of the main game identification information as a unit, and in the specific game state, after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number of times, the normal game state is set. And
After the execution of the special game is finished, the special game state is entered, and the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the main game identification information before the last round of the specific game state, thereby opening the variable prize opening When a game is executed, it is configured to maintain a specific game state during the execution of the variable prize opening opening game,
After the execution of the special game is finished, the specific game state is entered, and the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the main game identification information that is the last round of the specific game state, so that the variable prize opening game is When executed, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in a normal gaming state during the execution of the variable prize opening game.
Also,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (55)
A main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state. A game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured so that the game ball is not able to enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening can enter;
A main game identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the main game identification information;
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game part (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering a main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10);
Based on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to display the display after variably displaying the main game identification information. Main game identification information display control means,
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20)? Or, it is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game can be executed a plurality of times so that the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) can be made advantageous to the player until a predetermined period elapses. After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). Or a variable prize opening opening game that executes a unit game that can make a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player once until a specific period elapses. Special games that are feasible And a control means,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10),
A determination is made based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and the auxiliary game identification information display section (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to do,
When the result of determining whether or not the game is successful based on the auxiliary game random number is a winning period, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced. Within the displacement driving period, after the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the operation of displacing to the closed state is performed one or more times. Easy entry game determination execution means for executing easy entry game,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the normal gaming state and the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d than the normal gaming state). ) Has a specific gaming state that is easy to open,
When entering a specific area during the execution of the variable prize opening game, the special game is configured to be executed after the variable prize opening game ends.
The main game identification information is configured so that it can be controlled from the start to the stop display of the main game identification information as a unit, and in the specific game state, after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number of times, the normal game state is set. And
After the execution of the special game is finished, the special game state is entered, and the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the main game identification information before the last round of the specific game state, thereby opening the variable prize opening When a game is executed, it is configured to maintain a specific game state during the execution of the variable prize opening opening game,
After the execution of the special game is finished, the specific game state is entered, and the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the main game identification information that is the last round of the specific game state, so that the variable prize opening game is When executed, the game is in a specific gaming state during execution of the variable prize opening game, and is configured to be in a normal gaming state when the execution of the variable prize opening game is completed. It may be a pachinko gaming machine characterized by.

The following specifications apply to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example.
(1) It is set to V per type 1 type small.
(2) There are one or more special figure 2 reservations (the modified example is zero).
(3) Digestion in the order of entering balls (the modified example is special figure 1 priority digestion).
(4) The number of time reductions differs according to the big hit symbol (time reduction termination conditions are different).
(5) In the case of the big hit symbol A in the low and low state, the special figure 2 fluctuation is 10 times, or the special figure 2 fluctuation + the special figure 1 fluctuation is 30 times, and the time reduction is completed.
(6) In the case of the big hit symbol B in the low and low state, the special time 2 fluctuation + the special figure 1 fluctuation is 100 times, and the time reduction is completed.
(7) In the case of the big hit symbol A in the low and high state, the special time 2 fluctuation + the special figure 1 fluctuation is 100 times, and the time reduction is completed.
(8) The special figure 1 big hit fluctuation in the low and high state (which shifts after the first hit) is relatively longer than the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation.
As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (58)
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to the second starting port and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state A variable member that is configured to be easy and difficult to enter the game ball in the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, or to enter difficult compared to the open state;
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
With a specific area where game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A first main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a first main game random number based on a ball entering the first main game start opening;
First main game success / failure determination means for executing a first win / failure determination based on the first main game random number;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs. First random number temporary storage means;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit performs the first identification according to the first determination result based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second main game success / failure determination means for performing a second win / fail determination based on the second main game random number;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the second hold occurs. Second random number temporary storage means;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit performs the second identification according to the second determination result based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the information is variably displayed;
If the result of the first win / fail decision or the second win / fail decision is a win, the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first main game identification information display unit or the second main game first identification information display unit, and then variable. A special game control means for executing a special game or a variable prize port opening game that can make the winning port an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
During execution of the variable prize opening game, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. Has been
Among the first hold and the second hold, it is configured to satisfy the variable display start condition in order from the first identification information or the second identification information related to the first hold or the second hold that occurs early.
When entering a specific area during the execution of the variable prize opening game, the special game is configured to be executed after the variable prize opening game ends.
As a gaming state related to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is likely to be in an opened state compared to the normal gaming state,
The total number of repetitions of the unit of the first identification information and the second identification information when the first identification information or the second identification information is changed from the variable display start to the stop display as a unit and in the specific gaming state. After reaching the predetermined number of times A or the predetermined number of times B, it is configured to be controllable so as to enter the normal gaming state,
The predetermined number of times A is configured to be larger than the predetermined number of times B.
It is configured to be controllable so that it becomes a normal gaming state after the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a specific number of times when it is in a specific gaming state from the start to the stop display of the second identification information. And
As a special game, it has at least a first special game and a second special game which is a special game different from the first special game,
When the first special game is executed in the normal game state and the specific game state is entered after the end of the first special game, the first identification information and the second identification information are When the total number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number of times B, or when the number of repetitions of one unit of second identification information reaches a specific number of times, it is configured to be in a normal gaming state,
When the second special game is executed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state is reached after the second special game is finished, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed after the second special game is finished. When the total number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number of times A, it is configured to be in a normal gaming state,
When the first special game is executed in the specific game state and becomes the specific game state after the end of the first special game, the first identification information and the second identification information are A pachinko gaming machine configured to be in a normal gaming state when the total number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number of times A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is a combination of a decorative pattern indicating a big hit and a combination of a decorative pattern indicating a small hit. It may be configured to be a combination pattern of different decorative designs. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (59)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
Based on the determination result, identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of identification information;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display section, a special game or a variable prize opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. Special game control means,
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
Based on the information about the identification information received by the game information receiving means, provided with the effect display content control means capable of displaying the secondary game identification information in the effect display unit,
As a gaming state, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is a gaming state that is more profitable than the normal gaming state,
When receiving information related to the identification information, the secondary game identification information based on the identification information is configured to be displayed on the effect display device,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
During execution of the variable prize opening game, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. Has been
The display mode of the secondary game identification information based on the identification information that triggers execution of the special game displayed in the normal gaming state, and the identification information that triggers execution of the special game displayed in the specific gaming state Is configured to be the same display mode as the display mode of the secondary game identification information based on
The display mode of the secondary game identification information based on the identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening opening game displayed in the normal gaming state, and the variable winning opening opening game displayed in the specific gaming state is executed. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to have a display mode different from the display mode of the secondary game identification information based on the identification information that triggers.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this example seems to have more types of notice effects that deny small hits than types of notice effects that deny big hits among the notice effects that are executed before the reach effects in reach fluctuation. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko machines related to this concept (60)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination based on the random number;
Based on the determination result, identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of identification information;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control unit for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display section, a special game or a variable prize opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player is executed. It is configured as
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a unit game a plurality of times in which a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening or a variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time elapses.
During execution of the variable prize opening game, a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable prize opening or a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player is executed only once until a predetermined time elapses. Has been
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, provided with an effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
A plurality of types of notice effects (for example, a notice effect shown in FIG. 107) that is an effect suggesting the feasibility of a special game or variable prize opening opening game related to the identification information being displayed in a variable manner as the effect display contents are configured to be executable. And
It is configured so that there are more types of notice effects that make it definitive that variable prize opening opening games will not be executed than the number of kinds of notice effects that become definite that special games will not be executed It is a pachinko game machine.

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22, and a sound effect corresponding to the gaming state or the like is output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and flow down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game start opening A10, but difficult to be guided to the second main game start opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is not easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. . It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are spaced apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 The two main game start ports B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. In that case, the upper portion of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. May be.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) can be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. {However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area is The game balls flowing down the reference) may be configured not to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

  Next, a first grand prize winning port C10 and a second grand prize winning port C20 are provided above the out port D36, and a game ball flowing down the right side or the left side (based on the center of the game region) of the game region D30. Is configured so as to easily pass through the area where the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out mouth D36.

  Next, the first grand prize winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol, and is an out port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above D36. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above the opening D36. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display with symbols or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with the prize winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening, A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) in the upper ball tray D20 To region D30 A launching device D42 that launches each ball, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and a switch that turns on / off the pachinko gaming machine The power switch Ea and the like are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. }, A drive solenoid (not shown) (the above-mentioned first big prize opening electric combination solenoid C13, second big prize opening electric combination solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input / output device that is indispensable to control the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown). . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) The lighting control of the lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control part SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  The “random number” in the claims and the present specification is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “0” to “0” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). The value is randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like.

  In addition, the limited frequency is the variation type and / or selection rate of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and / or selectivity.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counters) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B that measures the drive (release) time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. doing. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c that measures the winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a probability variation number counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number, and a time reduction number counter MP52c capable of counting the time variation number. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game or a time shortening game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10 is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may have a function of performing a lottery transition from a specific game (for example, a probability-change game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time a symbol changes. Good (so-called pachinko machines with a falling lottery function).

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Here, the drawing variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

  Next, the stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to count how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific game state from the end of the special game in order to switch the effect stage. In addition, the consecutive resort number counter SM23c2 is configured to count the number of times that a big hit is won continuously during a specific game that continues.

  Next, the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c is configured to manage the progress status of the hold prefetch effect when the hold prefetch effect is executed over a plurality of variations of the main game symbol.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and resets the power supply unit E reset button ( It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been intentionally performed by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption) Compared to the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is not backed up in the RAM). To do. If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up in the RAM in step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the CPUMC of the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in step 1012. In step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and will be described later. The control command transmission process may be used for transmission), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers a scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the processing in step 1018 is performed. Transition. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. . Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs a prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. The winning ball payout control board KH is executed, and processing for managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1998, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes external signal output processing (output of information to the external terminal board, the hall computer H, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit SM side), and immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (NMI interrupt in this example), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets power-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPU MC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H <b> 10 (inflow, in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in Step 1102, in Step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the hold ball in the form of temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M, together with information on what number is held. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 and step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric-powered object releasing flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1202, in Step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (the flag state of the auxiliary gaming short time flag) and the acquired auxiliary gaming side gaming state and The main control board is determined by determining the stop symbol based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the holding ball (for example, when the auxiliary game short flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off). Temporarily store in M RAM area.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are “D0, D1, D2” as the stop symbols, and “D1, D2” as the stop symbols as the winning symbols. In the non-time-reduced game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed), and the open mode of the electric combination that will be opened is stopped. When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is (0.2 second open → 0.8 second closed → 5.0 second open, closed) (longest open). In the time-saving game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the release mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed). When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → close). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol “D0” during non-time-reduced games, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol “D1” during time-reduced games.

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol change time to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game short time flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is off) is set. In step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer. After starting MP11t-H, the auxiliary game symbol display on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g is started.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. In step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “winning” (D1 · D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens based on the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side (for example, in the case of the winning symbol “D1”, it is opened for 1 second → closed for 1 second) -> Open for 1 second-> Close for 1 second-> Open for 1 second-> Open in a closed state. In the case of a winning symbol "D2," open for 0.2 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds) The predetermined time concerning the opening time (opening and closing time) of the electric accessory is set. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric agent releasing flag. In step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric accessory B11d in the second main game start port B10. Next, in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game short time flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1239, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1239, in step 1240, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the information indicating that the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is started. An opening start command is set, and the process proceeds to step 1242. In the present embodiment, when the main game short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is the predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is kept open is the longest. Has been.

  Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and sets the electric agent release flag. Turn off. Next, in step 1248, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command for ending the longest opening of the electric accessory to the sub side, which is information indicating that the longest opening of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d has ended. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242. If No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. In this case, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port entrance information has been received from the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start port A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining the success / failure, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired (pending occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

  Next, in step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start port entrance information from the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls relating to the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game content determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the random determination random number for the first main game and the acquisition lot random number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (pending occurrence command) to the sub-main control unit SM. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and proceed to the next process (process in step 1400). In the case of No in Step 1302 and Step 1304, the process proceeds to Step 1312. In the case of No in Step 1312 and Step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (Process of Step 1400).

  In this embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in Step 1310 and Step 1320. However, the information on the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, and the information indicating that a random number has been acquired can be substituted by these pieces of information.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms whether there is no second main game symbol hold. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process to be described later, and the next process {the process of steps 1400 (1) and (2). }. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {steps 1400 (1), (2). The process proceeds to.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is fixedly displayed), during the variable fixed time, the fluctuation start condition for the next variable You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406. The second main game content determination random number) is read, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is stored. Shift (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol determination lottery based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number). To do.

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table (second main game success / failure lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-stochastic varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols related to the main game symbol are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) are selected. One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of special game rounds determined by referring to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. May} In the present embodiment, the average number of rounds per jackpot on the second main game side (8R × 700/1024 + 16R × 324/1024 = 10.5R) than the average round number on the first main game side (8R × 700/1024 + 16R × 324/1024 = 10.5R) 8R x 400/1024 + 16R x 624/1024 = 12.9R), so one symbol variation on the second main game side is more advantageous than one symbol variation on the first main game side It has become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average number of rounds for jackpots related to the first main game side and the average number of rounds for jackpots related to the second main game side may be configured identically. Also, the average number of rounds actually executed is the same for the first main game side jackpot and the second main game side jackpot, but the actual round number average value is the second main game side jackpot. You may comprise so that one may become larger than the big hit by the side of the 1st main game. Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which a game ball can easily enter the game until reaching the specified count that will close the grand prize opening when it is opened for a long time (for example, 20 seconds or more). Actually, it is a special game of 15 rounds, but if the opening for a long time (for example, 20 seconds or more) is 8 rounds and the opening for a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is 7 rounds, The actual round number of special games is 8 rounds.

  Next, in step 1411, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1411, in other words, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation / non-time-reduced gaming state), in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol result lottery result and the first Based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, Control goes to step 1414.

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this example, the present embodiment is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the result of lottery determination of the main game symbol. That is, when the result of the main game symbol is a winning lottery, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but is configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. It goes without saying. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side When the change is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, in other words, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, in step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1413, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1414. Further, the process of step 1413 may be executed immediately after the result of step 1420 becomes Yes (timing at which the variation time ends).

  Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and A command related to the current gaming state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side). To be sent). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol variation ends. It is set in the buffer MT10 (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) The main game symbol variation display is stopped, and the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

  Next, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter. In addition, in this example, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a specific game state (the process of a probability variation game state with a frequency | count limitation and a time reduction game state) after completion of the special game which concerns on all the jackpot symbols. Next, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). Even in the case of No in step 1420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is a value within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50). In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination, and performs the next processing (step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 14 (limited frequency table 1) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 50). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. In addition, compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average variation time. The limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol based on the main game random number, the result of lottery determination, and the number of reserved balls on the second main game side. ) And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 14 (limited frequency table 2) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50 ≧ G> 10). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. The limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time as compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3. Further, the limited frequency table 2 is configured such that the average variation time is shorter when there are two or three reserved balls than when there are zero or one reserved balls.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1456, in other words, if the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the third stage range (10 ≧ G), in step 1460, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game side random number. Based on the result of the lottery determination, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 14 (limited frequency table 3) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (10 ≧ G). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the variation time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and is constant regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

  Note that the content of the limited frequency table is not limited to this, and the content of the limited frequency table to be referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side is only in a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of reserves (both on the first main game side and the second main game side). Otherwise, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holds, and on the second main game side, if the number of holds is a predetermined number or more, the number of holds It is desirable to have a relatively shorter variation time than when the number is less than or equal to the predetermined number.

  In this embodiment, there are three types of limited frequency tables, and the configuration is such that the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3 is switched in three stages in this order (so-called three-stage ST). However, there is no problem even if the number of types of the limited frequency tables is changed and the order of the tables to be referenced is changed. Furthermore, there are two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and the table to be referenced is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 1 as a three-stage ST mode. Also good.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c. In the case of Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag and proceeds to step 1510. Note that if the answer is No in step 1502 or 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

  Next, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1550). Note that if the answer is No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short flag). Next, in step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1600). In the case of No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in steps 1604 and 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information to start a special game (special game start display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. In the case of No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the special game permission has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is immediately before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, when it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that continues to be opened, a pattern that performs opening and closing). To do. Next, in step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first big prize opening electric accessory C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is opened, and a special game timer MP34t (particularly, an opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and started, and the process proceeds to step 1622 To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1612, that is, when the big prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) is assigned to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly, the opening time timer) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the opening of the big prize opening. It is determined whether or not elapses. Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. In the case of No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). Is stopped and the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). . If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. Set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1930). In step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 80 times) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 27, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described. First, FIG. 19 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting, such as when the game machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clearing). When the information is received → the sub-side RAM is initialized, when various information commands are received → the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (f) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (f) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. 5 (f), first, in step 2050, the CPUSC of the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM determines the stay stage described later. Execute the decision process. Next, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a hold information management process to be described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decoration symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process to be described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a display command transmission control process (sends commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive process routine. To do.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2050 to S2900) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5E is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is sent to one terminal (in this example) of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM. , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends a command input port (described above) from the main control board M side. Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before this interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game has started on the main side (in this example, transition to the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state). In the case of Yes in Step 2052, in Step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2056, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the specific game execution flag, and proceeds to step 2066.

  Here, the specific game running flag is a flag indicating a specific game (for example, a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state, so-called ST), and is turned on when the specific game starts. The jackpot or stay stage management counter SM23c is turned off when the value exceeds an upper limit (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2052, in step 2058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game has ended {for example, determined by referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, or staying Determine whether the value of the stage management counter SM23c exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs)}. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets (zero clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2062, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the specific game execution flag. Next, in step 2064, the CPUSC of the sub control board S counts the consecutive game count counter SM23c2 (a counter that counts the number of consecutive big hits during a specific game, and the value is added in the processing of step 2410 described later. ) Is reset (cleared to zero), and the process proceeds to Step 2066. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2058, the process proceeds to Step 2066.

  Next, in step 2066, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2066, in step 2068, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol has been newly stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2068, in step 2070, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c (increment), and proceeds to step 2072. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2068, the process proceeds to step 2072 without executing the process of step 2070.

  Next, in step 2072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is a value within the first range (1 to 30). In the case of Yes in Step 2072, in Step 2074, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets “short effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stores in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and performs the next process (Step 2100). Process).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2072, in step 2076, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the second range (31 to 70). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2076, in step 2078, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “long effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stores in the RAM area), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2076, in step 2080, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the third range (71 to 80). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2080, in step 2082, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “fixed effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stores in the RAM area), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). . Note that if the answer is No in steps 2066 and 2080 (for example, when the game is not in a specific game), the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2100).

  In the present embodiment, the third stage (fixed effect stage) has only one type (5 seconds in this example) and one type of effect content (in this example, prefetching), regardless of the result of the lottery. Although the display content is different at the time of non-prefetching, the system is only a fixed time effect), but a plurality of variation modes and effect contents may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the number of types of production contents in the third stage is smaller than that in the second stage (long production stage). As the tendency, it is desirable that the number of types of both the variation pattern and the production content is “second stage> first stage> third stage”.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the stay stage for determining the content of the effect based on the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c that counts the number of symbol fluctuations during the specific game.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new electric accessory longest opening start command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in other words, when the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is started, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the electric agent longest open flag. Turn on and go to step 2110. On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new electric accessory longest release end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2106, in other words, when the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is completed, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the electric utility accessory longest open flag. The process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2106, the process proceeds to step 2110.

  Here, the longest open flag of the electric accessory is the period during which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened in the release mode in which the time for which the second main game start opening B11d is continuously opened is the longest (longest open). Is used to determine that the hold that occurred when the longest open flag of the electric accessory is on is based on the entry of the game ball that has been opened for the longest time. Is a flag. In the present embodiment, the longest open flag of the electric accessory is turned on only in the non-time-saving game.

  Next, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it has received a new hold occurrence command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing suspension counter (in this example, the maximum for the first main game and the maximum for the second main game is 4) 1 "is added (incremented). Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, and holds the hold information (in particular, a random value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, a lottery decision) Random numbers, design lottery random numbers, and variation mode lottery random numbers) are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

  Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the longest open electric utility flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2116, in step 2118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S is a hold on the second main game side. . In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S indicates that the hold information newly stored temporarily in the RAM area of the sub-control board S is a hold that occurred when the electric accessory was released to the maximum. The information is added, and the process proceeds to Step 2122. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2116 or step 2118, the process proceeds to step 2122 without executing the process in step 2120.

  Next, in step 2122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S pre-determines the success / failure result of each hold based on the hold information (particularly, the lottery random number) that is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a holding that is a winning (big hit) among the holdings that are consumed before the new holding based on the result of the prior determination. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2124, in step 2150, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a prefetch effect execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2142. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124, the process proceeds to step 2142 without executing the process in step 2150. Next, in step 2142, the CPUSC of the sub control board S makes full use of the effect display means SS on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13). The same number of on-hold display lamps as the counter value are turned on, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step 2200 processing).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2110, in step 2130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2130, in step 2132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 2134, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts the hold information related to the symbol variation to the remaining hold information.

  Next, in step 2136, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the digested hold is a hold that occurred when the electric utility object is fully opened. In the case of Yes in step 2136, in step 2138, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the longest release hold permission permission flag, and proceeds to step 2140. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2136, the process proceeds to step 2140 without executing the process in step 2138. It should be noted that the longest opening effect is generated only when the symbol relating to the entry changes (or the occurrence) when entering the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d when the electric accessory is longest open. For example, a change in the hold display mode, a change in the selected content of the effect (a change in the background or notice content), and the like.

  Next, in step 2140, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2142. In the case of No in step 2130, the process of steps 2132 to 2140 is not executed, the process proceeds to step 2142, the hold display process is performed, and then the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). To do.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the newly generated hold is a hold on the second main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored) is the “long effect stage”.

  In the case of Yes in step 2156, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the new hold based on the hold information (particularly, the variation mode determining random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Predetermining the fluctuation time. Next, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold variation time is determined to be equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Here, when the change time is preliminarily determined, for example, when the change mode random number value of the new hold is 900 to 1023, the change time is 10 seconds or more regardless of the hold number at the time of the new hold. Can be determined (see FIG. 12).

  In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit (for example, determination based on a winning lottery random number). In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a pre-reading effect lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2162, in step 2166, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is elected with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5, but it may be lower than the winning probability in step 2164). The pre-reading effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2156, in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored in the RAM area) is the “fixed effect stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit (for example, determination based on a winning lottery random number). In the case of Yes in step 2170, in step 2172, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a pre-reading effect lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (for example, ¼), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2170, in step 2174, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is elected with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/6, but it may be lower than the winning probability in step 2172). The pre-reading effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

  Next, in step 2176, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a pre-reading effect lottery (the lottery of any of step 2164, step 2166, step 2172, or step 2174) has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2176, in step 2178, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the hold number temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S, and the hold (trigger hold) won in the lottery is digested. The number of stoppages Ha (0 to 4 times) of the main game symbol until the end is derived. Next, in step 2180, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and derives the number of times Hb of the main game symbol to be changed until the current stay stage ends based on the counter value. .

  Here, the variation stop count Hb includes the variation stop count of the symbol that is currently displayed in a variable manner. In addition, since whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed is determined at the time of starting the change, as will be described later, when the symbol is changing, the pre-reading effect can be executed from the next change in which the changing symbol is stopped. is there.

  Next, in step 2182, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the prefetch effect (Ha in this example) is the minimum prefetch effect number (the minimum number of times for executing an effective prefetch effect, for example, 2 times) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2182, in step 2184, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S satisfies the relationship that the derived Ha and Hb satisfy Ha ≦ Hb (the pre-reading effect ends during the current stay stage). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2184, in step 2186, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets Ha to the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2142). Note that if any of Step 2152, Step 2154, Step 2160, Step 2168, Step 2176, Step 2182, and Step 2184 is No, the processing proceeds to the next processing (Step 2142 processing).

  In this way, when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations does not end during the current stay stage, the pre-reading effect is not executed (in particular, step 2184), so that the table switching and the pre-reading effect are executed simultaneously. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player is confused. In the present embodiment, after the pre-reading effect lottery is executed, whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed is determined according to the determination as to whether or not the stay stage is crossed. The order may be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be configured to execute a pre-reading effect lottery after it is determined to cross the stay stage (that is, when it is planned to cross the stay stage, In the first place, it also includes a configuration that does not execute the pre-reading effect lottery itself).

  Note that the pre-reading effect in this example may include a change related to the trigger hold in the effect that occurs even with the change related to the trigger hold, that is, the plurality of changes in the pre-read effect over a plurality of changes. For example, an effect in which an effect of the same mode or an effect of the same system is generated from a change before the change related to the trigger hold to a change related to the trigger hold.

  Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, even when the end of the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations is after the end of the current stay stage (or switching), the pre-reading effect can be executed, When the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations straddles the end (or switching) of the stay stage, the expectation that becomes a big hit in any of the fluctuations related to the pre-reading effect does not straddle the end (or switching) of the stay stage. You may comprise so that it may be relatively higher than the case where production is performed. In such a configuration, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention on whether or not the pre-reading effect occurs across the end (or switching) of the stay stage (and effect), and the interest of the game It will be possible to improve the nature.

  In addition, when the pre-reading effect can be executed even when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations is after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, the pre-reading effect is until the final change at which the current stay stage ends. It may be configured to end (suspend) at. In addition, when the pre-reading effect is interrupted, a pre-reading effect different from the interrupted pre-reading effect (for example, a pre-reading effect or other effect corresponding to the effect at the stay stage after switching) can be executed instead. May be.

  In addition, in a certain stay stage, a high-awaiting effect or a pre-reading effect informing that a variation mode having a long variation time is selected in subsequent fluctuations, and the high-expectedness effect or When the variation mode with a long variation time is not selected, the high expectation effect or the variation mode with a long variation time may be selected at the next stay stage. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the pre-reading effect in the next stay stage is an effect in accordance with the next stay stage.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is ON. If YES in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, a doublet such as “7, 7, 7”, etc. If the symbol is a lost symbol, a variation such as “1, 3, 5”, etc.} and a variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes effect content determination processing described later. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2300). Note that, also in the case of No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the longest release time hold permission permission flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect content determination table SM25ta {particularly the normal time table (longest open time hold permission permission flag off) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol}. }, The contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2254, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the longest release hold permission permission flag. Next, in step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the longest release hold execution execution flag. Next, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta {particularly the normal time table (longest open time hold permission permission flag ON}) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. Then, the contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, FIG. 25 is an example of the effect content determination table SM25ta. In particular, the normal performance content determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the performance in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and based on the variation mode of the main game symbol as shown in the figure. , One effect content is determined from a plurality of effect content candidates. In addition, when the longest open-time hold production permission flag is on, an effect similar to the production during the stay in the “long production stage” is determined (the longest open-time hold production permission flag is set). If it is “off”, the player can easily recognize that the effect during the stay in the “long stage” does not occur during the non-time-reduced game, and that the change is related to the hold that occurred at the time of the longest release. it can). In addition, this example is only an example, and the content of the production, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, etc. are not limited to this, and for example, the production is performed with reference to the variation mode (and the lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number. You may comprise so that the content may be determined (It may comprise so that a different production can be performed when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the main game side is the same).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, on the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, that is, in the case where the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, in step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub control board S It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0 (a situation where a prefetch effect is executed). In the case of Yes in step 2264, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S decrements (decrements) the value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. Next, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the currently set stay stage is the “long effect stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2268, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the pre-reading effect dedicated to the “long effect stage” (for example, “at the start of the change,“ ... more times…! ”) A command for displaying the effect of counting down the value is set, and the process proceeds to Step 2274.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2268, in other words, in the case where the pre-reading effect is executed in the “fixed effect stage”, in step 2272, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is a success / failure stage when the “fixed effect stage” changes. The effect content at is determined as a pre-reading effect dedicated to the stage (for example, an effect in which the background display color changes based on the degree of expectation of jackpot), and the process proceeds to Step 2274. In the case of No in step 2264, the process proceeds to step 2274.

  Next, in step 2274, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta (particularly, the table for specific games) based on the main game symbol variation mode and the currently set stay stage. Then, the contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, the specific game time effect content determination table in FIG. 25 is a table that is referred to when determining the effect in the probability varying game state and the time-reduced game state (80 STs in this example). As shown, the content of the effect is switched according to the set stay stage (the number of times of variation during the ST) (the content of the effect is also switched in response to the change of the variation mode / variation time of the main game symbol). Configured). An example of the content of the production will be described. The fixed time production, which is the production selected as the “fixed production stage”, starts with the variation of the decorative design, as shown in the image diagram at the bottom of the figure. When the image related to the change is displayed for 1 second, the effect at the success / failure stage is displayed for 1 second. Here, the effect at the success / failure stage is an image that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB if the pre-reading effect is not executed, and after the effect is displayed, there is an operation of the sub input button SB or for another 1 second. When the time elapses, the display shifts to the effect display in the success / failure notification stage. On the other hand, if the pre-reading effect is being executed, the effect at the success / failure stage is the effect that the display color of the background image changes determined in the process of step 2268 (ie, the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB does not occur). ), And when one second elapses after the effect display, the display shifts to the effect display in the success / failure notification stage. Next, in the success / failure notification stage, an effect is provided to notify the player whether the variation is a win or a loss. When the pre-reading effect continues, the execution state of the pre-reading effect (in this example, the background display color) may be inherited until the end of the pre-reading effect. When the fixed time has passed), an image for notifying the result of the change is displayed. In addition, this example is only an example, and the content of the production, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, etc. are not limited to this, and for example, the production is performed with reference to the variation mode (and the lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number. You may comprise so that the content may be determined (It may comprise so that a different production can be performed when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the main game side is the same). Although not specifically shown in the present example, a dedicated effect (for example, a super battle reach, a special battle reach, etc.) is executed at any stay stage during the specific game even when the first main game side holds out. You may comprise so that it may obtain. In addition, the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB may be configured not to be executed in a situation where the effect execution scale is difficult to secure (for example, when staying in the “short effect stage” in this example). Is preferred.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2304. Next, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 2309, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2310. In the case of No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2311, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the decorative symbol variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a decorative symbol variation display command (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). Then, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2312, in step 2316, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the decorative symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2316, in step 2318, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). The process proceeds to step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2316, in step 2320, whether the CPUSC of the sub control board S has reached the display timing of the notice image or the reach image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub sub control unit SS side). The process proceeds to step 2330. Note that if the result in Step 2320 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2331, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a decorative symbol stop display command (deterministic display command) (transmits to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). To do). Next, in step 2332, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2334, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol changing flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2400). Note that if the answer is No in Step 2310 or Step 2330, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the big hit is the first hit (the big hit in the non-probability variation / non-time shortened gaming state). If YES in step 2406, the process proceeds to step 2410. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2406 (if it is the first hit), in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the longest release hold execution execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, in the case of N = first hit, in step 2409, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the longest opening time pending execution execution flag, and proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the value of the consecutive game count counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 2412. In the case of No in step 2408, the process proceeds to step 2412.

  Next, in step 2412 and step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special gaming flag and performs a big hit start display on the effect display device SG (appropriate display based on the type of the big hit). The process proceeds to step 2416. In the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2416.

  Next, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type). Next, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the big hit being executed is the maximum round big hit (for example, the 16R big hit and the big hit relating to the 7A / 7B symbols). judge. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of balls earned at the time of consecutive games, and a plurality of types of identification) A command related to the display of special game or production during specific game, which is displayed only when a condition of one or a plurality of combinations such as generation of all effects is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 2426. On the other hand, if any of step 2418 and step 2420 is No, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the big hit progress display, and proceeds to step 2426.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the jackpot execution a special effect based on the number of consecutive hits of the jackpot (the initial hit is not counted), and the second main game start opening In the case where a big hit is caused by the holding caused by the entry of the electric accessory B11d during the longest opening, even if the big hit is the first hit, the second main game start opening electric combination is counted as the number of consecutive games. It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of the change related to the hold that occurs during the longest release of the object B11d. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as conditions for generating an ending effect, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit with a specific effect) , Etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

  Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (appropriate display based on the big hit type). Next, in step 2430, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the special gaming flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). Note that if the answer is No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Function)
Next, the operation in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a prefetch effect during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a specific game is completed without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, in the situation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, after the number of holding balls on the first main game side is digested and the number of holding balls on the second main game side becomes four, at the timing of 1 in the figure The second main game symbol starts to change. Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, when the main game symbol fluctuates 30 times after the special game, the short effect stage ends and the long effect stage is entered.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long production stage is 40 (Ha ≦ Hb). Will be. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the first second main game symbol has started to change after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the change.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol related to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The change related to the trigger hold is a loss, and the change related to the trigger hold in the long performance stage is a change time of 10 seconds or more, and thus the change time is 60 seconds. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the pre-reading effect ends when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long performance stage is 1 (Ha> Hb). Will not be. Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 70 times after the special game, the long effect stage is ended and the process proceeds to the fixed effect stage.

  Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 2 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the fixed stage is finished is 10 (Ha ≦ Hb). Will be. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, since the first change of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetch effect is determined, the prefetch effect is executed from the change. Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the pre-reading effect is ended when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends. Note that since the prefetching effect is a prefetching effect in the fixed effect stage, the fluctuation time related to the trigger suspension is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing of 12 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 80 times after the special game, the fixed effect stage ends and the specific game also ends.

  Next, the operation in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an action diagram showing a variation mode of a main game symbol during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a long production stage is complete | finished without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, under the situation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol that becomes the first variation in the specific game is started. As shown in the lower part of the figure, at the time of losing, the limited frequency table 1 on the first main game side and the limited frequency table 1 on the second main game side have the same table contents and do not depend on the number of holds. . In this case (the contents of the table surrounded by a dotted line in the limited frequency table 1) is X. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from two to one due to the change.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the first main game symbol change that becomes the second change in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. At the start of change of the first main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the first main game side, and at the start of change of the first main game symbol related to timing 1 in the figure, the hold on the first main game side is Although there is one, the table contents to be referred to are X regardless of the number of holds.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the third variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the fifth variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is changed from three to two due to the change. At the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to this timing, there are three holds on the second main game side, and at the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to timing 3 in the figure, the hold on the second main game side is Although there is one, the table contents to be referred to are X regardless of the number of holds.

  In this way, in this example, during the short stage, regardless of whether the change is on the first main game side or the second main game side, and regardless of the number of holds, the change mode is determined. The contents of the referenced table are the same.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, since the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th change in the specific game, is finished, the short effect stage is ended and the long effect stage is switched. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the 31st variation in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to when the timing is changed is Z. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the 32nd variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to when the timing is changed are Y. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the second main game side, and at the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to the timing 6 in the figure, the hold on the second main game side is Since there are two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of holds (Y and Z).

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol that becomes the 33rd variation in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to when the timing is changed is Z. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the change of the first main game symbol that is the 34th change in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to when the timing is changed are Y. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. At the start of the change of the first main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the first main game side, and at the beginning of the change of the first main game symbol related to the timing 8 in the figure, the hold on the first main game side is Since there are two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of holds (Y and Z).

  In this way, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode are the same regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side during the long performance stage. However, when the number of holdings is different, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode can be different.

  Note that the table contents when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol during a specific game are not limited to this, and an example of the operation will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an action diagram showing a variation mode of a main game symbol during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a long production stage is complete | finished without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the second variation in the specific game is started. Also, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the variation mode of the second main game symbol has different table contents depending on whether or not there is a hold on the first main game side at the time of losing. A case where there is a hold on the first main game side is defined as X '. The case where there is no hold on the first main game side is set as Y ′. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X ′ because there is a hold on the first main game side. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the fourth variation in the specific game, is started. Due to the change, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing 3 in the figure, the second main game symbol that is the fifth variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are Y 'because there is no hold on the first main game side. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change.

  Thus, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode on the second main game side during the short performance stage are configured to differ depending on whether or not there is a hold on the first main game side.

  Next, at the timing 4 in the figure, since the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th change in the specific game, is ended, the short effect stage is ended and the long effect stage is switched. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the 32nd variation in the specific game is started, and at the timing of 6 in the diagram, the second main game that becomes the 35th variation in the specific game. The design changes. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol at the timing of 5 in the figure, the number of the first main game side is one hold, whereas the change of the second main game symbol at the timing of 6 in the figure At the time, the number of holds on the first main game side is zero, but the table contents referred to when determining the variation mode of the second main game symbol are the same, and the variation time is 10 seconds. ing.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of times of change of the main game symbol is predetermined in the game in the probability variation game state (and the time shortening game state) with the number of times limited. In response to the number of times, the candidates for the variation mode (variation time) to be selected are different (switched). In addition, by changing the contents of the effect according to the change of the change mode, the mode of the effect is changed according to the progress of the game in the specific game {probability change game state with a limited number of times (and time-reduced game state)}. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the game.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
In addition, although not particularly illustrated in the present example, if there is a big hit (especially a hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, a special effect is executed to hold the big hit. It is possible to produce the jackpot related to in a novel way. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 6 in the first modification from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 1636 (Modification 1) to Step 1800 (Modification 1), the purpose of which is to execute an end demo. That is, when the final round of the special game is completed, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the end demonstration execution permission flag in Step 1636 (Modification 1), and proceeds to Step 1638 (Modification 1). Next, in Step 1638 (Variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demonstration execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1638 (Modification 1), in Step 1800 (Modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an end demo time control process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1997). . It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997) also in the case of No in step 1638 (change 1).

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of Step 1800 (Modification 1) of FIG. 31 in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demonstration execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a long demo time big hit symbol (7A and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds a long time (for example, 10 seconds) to the end demo time timer (the main timer for measuring the end demo time of the special game). Set and start, then proceed to Step 1810. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1804, in other words, if the stop symbol is the short demo time big hit symbol (3A, 3B, 5A, 5B), in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the end demo time timer. A short time (for example, 3 seconds) is set and started, and the process proceeds to Step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub-side and a command related to the determined end demo time information (step 1999, the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process). Sent to the side). Next, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the end demonstration execution flag, and proceeds to step 1814. In the case of No in step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1814.

  Next, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the end demonstration execution flag. Next, in step 1818, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the end demonstration execution permission flag. Next, in step 1820, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the above-described gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997). Even in the case of No in step 1814, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 of FIG. 19 in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 2480 (Modification 1) to Step 2600 (Modification 1), and the purpose is to execute the end demonstration effect and the end demonstration extension effect. That is, after turning off the special game, in step 2480 (change 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the end demonstration time is long (10 seconds). In the case of Yes in Step 2480 (Modification 1), in Step 2482 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts by setting a long time (for example, 10 seconds) in the demonstration time display timer, and in Step 2486 ( Shift to 1). On the other hand, if No in Step 2480 (Modification 1), in Step 2484 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts by setting a short time (for example, 3 seconds) in the demonstration time display timer. The process shifts to 2486 (change 1).

  Next, in Step 2486 (Variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying an end demo image (for example, an image informing the number of game balls acquired, the number of consecutive games, etc.) (Step 2900). In the display command transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side). Next, in Step 2488 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the end demonstration display flag, and proceeds to Step 2490 (Modification 1). Note that if the answer is No in Step 2404 or Step 2426, the process proceeds to Step 2490 (Modification 1).

  By making the changes as described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, at the end of the special game, the end demonstration effect for informing the result of the special game and the like can be executed, and after the demonstration effect ends. (After the special game ends), the specified period after the start of the change of the main game (special game) (if there is a jackpot hold, until the end of the jackpot change, if there is no jackpot hold, it relates to the hold that currently exists By displaying the same effect as the demonstration effect (e.g., continuously displaying an image notifying the result of the special game even during the main game symbol change) When there is a big hit hold in the hold, it is configured so that an image substantially the same as the demonstration effect is displayed until immediately before the symbol stop (= big hit) related to the big hit hold. After the end of the special game, it becomes a novel effect that suddenly becomes the next big hit without recognizing the fluctuation during the specific game, and the special game is re-started, improving the fun of the game It becomes possible. In addition, by making the execution time of the end demonstration effect different depending on the main game symbol won in the big hit, the player can make the end demonstration effect and the effect during the change of the main game symbol performing the same effect as the end demonstration effect. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish and the interest of the game will increase.

  Next, in Step 2490 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the end demonstration display flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 2490 (Modification 1), in Step 2492 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S has a demo time display timer (sub-side timer for measuring the end demo time of the special game) value. It is determined whether or not it is zero. In the case of Yes in Step 2492 (Modification 1), in Step 2600 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes an end demonstration extension effect execution process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900). To do. Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900) also in the case of No in step 2490 (modified 1) or step 2492 (modified 1).

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, after the special game ends, the game is always shifted to the probability variation gaming state with the number of times limited, and the effect of the game is increased by gradually changing the production of the period in the probability variation gaming state. Configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the player's expectation cannot be expressed in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state depending on the jackpot symbol. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem is a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter in the second grand prize opening C20. In addition, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a configuration (so-called ball check) in which a game ball enters the specific area C22 during execution of a special game, and then shifts to a probability-changing game machine state after the special game ends. Machine).

  First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. First, the differences from this embodiment are step 1408 (second), step 14012-1 (second), and step 1412-2 (second), the purpose of which is a non-stochastic game state and time reduction. The variation mode in the gaming state is different from that shown in the present embodiment. That is, after determining the stop symbol of the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1408 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game short time flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1408 (second), in step 1412-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode of the main game symbol based on the main game side random number / result determination lottery result. On the other hand, if No in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1411 and the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1411, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 0, in step 1412-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game based on the main game side random number / winning lottery result. The variation mode of the symbol is determined. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, the same processing as in this embodiment is executed in the processing of steps 1450 and 1413.

  Here, FIG. 35 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the combination of main game symbols that are big hits is different, and a table that is referred to in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is provided. Of the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols for which a special game that makes it easy for a game ball to enter a specific area is “5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, and 7B”. The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the area is executed is “2A”.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 6 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1611 (second) and step 1850 (second), and the purpose thereof is a distribution game (unit game that opens the second big prize opening C20 having a specific area). ) Can be executed. That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608 or when the special game execution flag is on, in step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M It is determined whether the round to be executed is a sorting game execution round (in this example, the second R, 4R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1611 (second), the process proceeds to step 1612 and the same processing as in this embodiment is executed.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 36 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second big prize opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot symbol that is open for time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B · 5A · 5B · 7A · 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses a long open pattern (for example, 15 seconds open) as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. , An open pattern designed so that the ball entering the specific area C22 is definitive) is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second major winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -(For example, an opening pattern designed to be 0.1 second opening and non-entry into the specific area C22 is determined), and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the second embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is “5A / 7A”, and the ratio selected at the time of the big hit is “524/1024”. The long open symbol on the side is “3B, 5B, 7B”, and the ratio selected at the time of big hit is “1024/1024”, so the second main game side than the big hit on the first main game side It is configured that the second big winning opening C20 has a higher ratio of being long open in the sorting game execution round, that is, it is easier for a game ball to enter the specific area C22 at the big hit.

  Next, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

  Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. . If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1866, in step 1868, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag, and proceeds to step 1878. In the case of No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1634). Even in the case of No in step 1868, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 36 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about step 1680 (second), step 1682 (second), step 1684 (second), and step 1686 (second), the purpose of which is the second embodiment. In the sorting game executed at, whether or not the player enters the specific area C22 is different from the possibility of transition to the probability varying gaming state and the upper limit of the number of times of variation in the time-saving gaming state. That is, when this subroutine is executed, in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in step 1682 (second). Next, in steps 1652 and 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) to the time-count counter MP52c and proceeds to step 1658, and thereafter in steps 1658 and 1660. The same processing as that of the present embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times) in the time-count counter MP52c. The value is preferably a predetermined number A or less), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

  Here, in 2nd Embodiment, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a time shortening game state after completion | finish of a special game irrespective of the presence or absence of the entrance to the specific area | region C22 during a special game. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of times of change in the time-reduced game state after the special game is the same as the number of times of change in the probability change game state A (In this example, 80 times), and when there is no game ball entering the specific area during the special game, the number of times of change to the time-saving game state after the special game is different from the predetermined number A (less) ) Is a predetermined number B which is the number of times (in this example, 50 times). In addition, the variation mode of the main game symbol during the time-reduced gaming state is such that a three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3) is used for a predetermined number A of time-reduced gaming states. The main game table 3-2 is referred to in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times B, and a table with different effect contents is also referred to. In addition, the said structure is applied also when the big jackpot symbol that triggered the execution of the special game is the same or different (for example, even if it is a special game triggered by the same jackpot symbol, the execution of the special game The number of time reductions differs depending on whether or not a particular area C22 is entered. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number of time-saving games may be determined based on the symbol at the time of big hit (for example, during special games) If the player has not entered the specific area C22, the upper limit number of fluctuations in the time-saving game is determined by the big hit symbol, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 39 is an example of an effect content determination table in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that it has an effect content determination table that is referenced in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state shown in the lower right part of the same figure. In the second embodiment, if a game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during a special game, the game state after the special game is not a probability variation game state, but a non-probability variation / time shortening game state (50 variations). ) In such a case, the contents of the effect are determined with reference to the table. In addition, this example is an example to the last, and is not limited to this, such as the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation, the content of production, a fluctuation | variation aspect, the structure of a table.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, whether or not to enter the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game is determined depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game (specific area) In the case of a game machine (so-called tamagyo type game machine) that does not enter the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball and does not transition to the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball, By changing the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening game state from the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation game state, an appropriate production according to the player's profit mode is executed. It can be done. Although not specifically shown in the present example, when executing the distribution game, a dedicated effect (the effect of inquiring whether or not the second big prize opening C20 is long open, the entry to the specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not a ball is made, an effect of notifying that a specific area C22 has been entered, etc. {the execution mode is not particularly limited, In the case of the effect of notifying that the entry into the specific area C22 has been made, at the timing (desirably immediately after) that the entry has been made, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a production device (for example, a so-called production movable body accessory or a light guide plate) provided on the front surface (for example, on the production display device SG). Display an image labeled “V” or The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}.

  In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big prize opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or less than one launch interval of game balls) and a predetermined time after the first time is released. A second unit game that can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time after a time closure. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time with low expectation for transition to the probability variation is finished, the probability There is a possibility that the opening operation of the second time with high expectation to the change transition is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. The second time is preferably equal to or longer than one game ball launch interval in order to ensure that a player enters a specific area, and is (half the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game It is more preferable that it is equal to or greater than or equal to or greater than (one launch interval of balls), and it is particularly preferable to be equal to or greater than (the upper limit winning number of the round) × (one launch interval of game balls).

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, whether or not to enter the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game is determined depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game (specific area) In the case of a game machine (so-called tamagyo type game machine) that does not enter the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball and does not transition to the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball, By changing the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening game state from the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation game state, an appropriate production according to the player's profit mode is executed. It can be done. Although not specifically shown in the present example, when executing the distribution game, a dedicated effect (the effect of inquiring whether or not the second big prize opening C20 is long open, the entry to the specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not a ball is made, an effect of notifying that a specific area C22 has been entered, etc. {the execution mode is not particularly limited, In the case of the effect of notifying that the entry into the specific area C22 has been made, at the timing (desirably immediately after) that the entry has been made, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a production device (for example, a so-called production movable body accessory or a light guide plate) provided on the front surface (for example, on the production display device SG). Display an image labeled “V” or The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}.

  In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big prize opening C20 is in the open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or less than one launch interval of game balls) and a predetermined time after the first time is released. A second unit game that can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time after a time closure. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time with low expectation for transition to the probability variation is finished, the probability There is a possibility that the opening operation of the second time with high expectation to the change transition is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. The second time is preferably equal to or longer than one game ball launch interval in order to ensure that a player enters a specific area, and is (half the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game It is more preferable that it is equal to or greater than or equal to or greater than (one launch interval of balls), and it is particularly preferable to be equal to or greater than (the upper limit winning number of the round) × (one launch interval of game balls).

  In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called a ball-like machine) that can shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished by entering the specific area C22 during execution of the special game as in the second embodiment, 1) There is only one grand prize opening, and at the one big prize opening, a normal round (a round in which the entry to the specific area C22 is invalid) and an allocation game execution round (a entry to the specific area C22) (2) A special prize opening A and a special prize opening B having a specific area C22 are provided, and a normal round is executed at the big prize opening A. (3) In the arrangement that overlaps vertically with the big prize opening A and the big prize opening B having the specific area C22 (the big prize opening B is on the top). Establish a regular round at the grand prize opening A, Execute the minute game execution round, and the entry into the specific area C22 can be effective only during the execution of the distribution game execution round. (4) The big prize opening A and the big prize opening B having the specific area C22 up and down Are arranged in such a way as to overlap (the winning prize opening B is on the top), and a normal round is executed at the winning prize opening A, and a distribution game execution round is executed at the winning prize opening B. A game ball can enter the specific area C22 only during the execution of the game execution round (a shielding member is provided, and if the shielding member is in an open state, it is easy to enter the specific area C22 and the shielding member May be in a closed state, it is difficult to enter the specific area C22).

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine which enters the specific area C22 during execution of the special game and shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends is illustrated. The configuration is not limited to the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration having a specific area C22 different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 40 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is illustrated, that is, the number of winning balls in the first main game starting port A10 is 3, and the second main gaming starting port B10. The number of prize balls in the first prize opening C10 is 15, and the number of prize balls in the second prize opening C20 is 13, and the number of prize balls in the general prize opening is 10 balls. Thus, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the number of prize balls in the second big prize opening C20 is smaller than the number of prize balls in the first big prize opening C10.

  Next, FIG. 41 shows the first (second) main game symbol display processing related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 11 in the first modification from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1450 (second variation 1), step 1431-1 (second variation 1), and step 1431-2 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1411. When the limited frequency counter value is not 0, in step 1450 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1413.

  In step 1440, after the condition device operation flag is turned on, in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is a limit frequency big hit symbol (time reduction after the big hit ends) It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot symbol that becomes a limited frequency state after the gaming state ends, and in this example, it is 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), in step 1431-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter to a predetermined number (100 times in this example). Set and go to step 1500.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) in FIG. 13 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the first stage range (100 ≧ G> 21). In the case of Yes in step 1451-1, in step 1451-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 3 and based on the main game side random number and the lottery result, the variation mode related to the main game symbol ( (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1451-1, in step 1451-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the second stage range (G = 21). To do. When the limited frequency counter value is 21, it is the final fluctuation in the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-3, in step 1451-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1451-4, in step 1451-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1, and based on the main game side random number and the lottery result, the variation mode related to the main game symbol (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). In the case of No in step 1451-4, the process proceeds to step 1451-2, and the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined with reference to the main game table 3. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, in determining the variation mode between the case of the probability variation gaming state and the case of the non-probability variation gaming state in the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state. The table to be referred to is different, in other words, when the game ball is entered into the specific area C22 during execution of the jackpot related to the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B", and when the ball is not entered, The tables that are referred to when the variation mode is determined by the final symbol variation in the time-saving gaming state are configured to be different. If No in step 1451-3, in step 1451-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 2 and relates to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery. The fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1413). In the first modification from the second embodiment, when the big hit relating to the limit frequency big hit symbol “7B” is completed, the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, and the short time counter MP52c Is set to 80 times. With this configuration, when the limited frequency counter value is not within the first stage range, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 20 or less, the non-time-reduced gaming state and the limited frequency counter value is 0. A bigger situation. In such a state, by referring to the limited frequency table and determining the variation mode of the main game symbol, when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol “7B” is completed, Transition is made as follows: “80 time-variation game state for 80 variations → limited frequency state for 20 symbol variations (non-time-reduced game state)”. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and in the time-saving gaming state, the limited frequency state A (the limited frequency table to be referred to is “limited frequency table A1 → limited frequency table A2 → limited” in the period of 80 symbol variations. Frequency table A3 "), and the limited frequency state B (referred to as the limited frequency table to be referred to is" limited frequency table ") in the period of 20 symbol fluctuations after the time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. In other words, the limited frequency state may be configured not to straddle different game states. In addition, when “7B” which is the limit frequency big hit symbol is won, 80 times is set in the short-time counter MP52c regardless of whether or not the player enters the specific area C22 during execution of the special game related to “7B”. The limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, that is, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency state after the time-saving gaming state ends. If the limited frequency counter value is not 0, it may be regarded as a big hit in the extended game, and the aforementioned extended game counter value may be added (the time-saving gaming state is Even if it is finished, if you win a big hit in a limited frequency state, you can consider it as a big hit in the Renso.) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when “7B”, which is the limit frequency big hit symbol, is won, and the player enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to “7B”, the time-count counter MP52c is displayed. 80 times is set and the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times. On the other hand, when the ball does not enter the specific area C22, the short time counter MP52c is set to 50 times and the limited frequency counter is set to 70 times. You may comprise. In addition, when “7B”, which is the limit frequency big hit symbol, is won, in the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game in the case of not entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the “7B” In the final variation, the variation mode of the main game symbol may be determined with reference to a limited frequency table (for example, the limited frequency table 3) referred to only by the final variation. Note that the contents of the limited frequency table 3 may be configured so that a uniform variation time of 7 seconds is determined regardless of the number of holds, in both cases of winning and losing. In addition, when “7B”, which is the limit frequency big hit symbol, is won, in the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game in the case of not entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the “7B” The limited frequency table referred to in the final variation is referred to in the final variation in the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game when entering the specific area C22 during execution of the special game related to “7B”. The tables may be configured to be the same, and in such a configuration, the content of the effect and the effect tendency in the final change in the time-saving gaming state may be the same.

  Here, FIG. 43 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are that the combination of main game symbols that are big hits is different and that a limited frequency table is provided. Of the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols for which a special game that makes it easy for a game ball to enter a specific area is “5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, and 7B”. The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the area is executed is “4A”. In addition, when the big hit related to “7B” which is the limit frequency big hit symbol described above is completed, the game shifts to a time reduction game state of 80 symbol fluctuations (the fluctuation time is determined by referring to the main game table 3). When the 80 symbol variations are completed, the transition to the limited frequency state of the 20 symbol variations is performed thereafter (the variation time is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2). In the limited frequency state in which the limited frequency table 2 is referenced, the main game symbol variation time is configured so that a long time exceeding 10 seconds is not selected regardless of the winning lottery result. In addition, the final variation (80th variation after the end of the big hit) that is shifted to the time when the big hit relating to the limit frequency big hit symbol “7B” ends is specified during the execution of the “7B”. When there is an entry into the area C22, the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1, while when there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the execution of “7B”, The variation mode is determined by referring to the game table 3 (the shortest variation time in the limited frequency table 1 is longer than the shortest variation time in the main game table 3) . It should be noted that the limited frequency table 1 or the main game table 3 can be referred to in the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state, but the case where the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the non-stochastic variation game The content of the effect in the final variation may be different from that in the state, that is, the content of the effect in the final variation may be different depending on whether or not a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. Good. For example, when referring to the limited frequency table 1 that is a relatively long-time symbol variation, whether the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are ended or a big hit is caused by the symbol variation. An effect may be executed.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 17 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1611 (second modification 1), steps 1635-1 (second modification 1), and 1635-2 (second modification 1). After setting the special game start display instruction command to the side or when the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executed in step 1611 (second variation 1). It is determined whether or not the round to be performed is a distribution game execution round (the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is to be opened, in this example, the second R and the fourth R). If Yes in step 1611 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1850 (second), and if No, the process proceeds to step 1612.

  Also, if it is the final round in the special game in step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M in the step 1635-1 (second variation 1), the special demonstration completion demonstration by turning on the end demonstration execution permission flag. The flag that will start the time) is turned on, and the flow proceeds to Step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the process proceeds to step 1635-2 (second modification 1). Next, in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demonstration execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1635-2 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1800 (modification 1), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of an end demonstration time control process according to the subroutine of Step 1800 (Modification 1) of FIG. 32 (Modification 1) in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is step 1803 (second modification 1), that is, if the end demonstration execution flag is OFF in step 1802, step 1803 (second modification 1), The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22 in the special game. If Yes in step 1803 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1806, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1808. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the special game end demonstration time, which is the period after the end of the last round of the special game, is the time when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. The time value is different depending on whether or not there is a ball. In addition, the conditions that the special game end demonstration time is different are not limited to this, and may be different depending on the game state at the time of the big hit, for example. Specifically, (1) it differs depending on whether it is a probability variation gaming state or a non-probability variation gaming state, (2) it differs depending on whether it is a time shortening gaming state or a non-time shortening gaming state, ( 3) a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, a probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, (4) a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, a probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, a non-stochastic variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, and a non-stochastic variation gaming state and You may comprise so that it may differ by a part combination with a non-time shortening game state.

  Also, in this example, for a special game related to a certain jackpot symbol, (1) a special game when a special game is won in the non-time-reduced game state and a special game is entered into the specific area C22 during the special game. Game end demonstration time is the first period (10 seconds), (2) Special game end demonstration time when a special game is won in the non-time-reduced game state and there is no entry to the specific area C22 during the special game Is the second period (3 seconds), (3) If the special game is won in the time-reduced game state and a special area C22 is entered during the special game, the special game end demonstration time is the second period ( (1 second), (4) If the special game is won in the time-reduced game state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game, the special game end demonstration time is the third period (3 seconds) In this way, the configuration may be such that “second period <third period <first period”. Such a configuration is preferably applied to a special game won in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state or the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. In addition, as a specific example of the effect executed at the special game end demonstration time, in the first period, the effect of notifying the transition to the probability variation game state, forgetting to pick up the IC card used for renting the game ball An effect related to alerting the player, an effect that displays the logo of the gaming machine maker, and an effect that informs the transition to the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced game state in the third period, forgetting to remove the IC card An effect related to alerting is executed, and in the second period, an effect of notifying that the probability variation gaming state (the consecutive resort state) continues is executed. In this way, it may be configured such that the effect executed is different depending on the length of the special game end demonstration time. Also, when comparing the length of the special game end demo time according to the situation, the special game end demo time when the special game is in a non-stochastic variable gaming state and the special game is in a probability variable gaming state (first hit) Is 10 seconds, special game end demonstration time is 3 seconds when the special game ends after the non-stochastic game state and time-reduced game state, the probability change game state before the start of the special game and the probability change after the special game ends You may comprise so that it may become the relationship of time values, such as special game completion | finish demonstration time for 1 second when it will be in a game state (continuation resort continuous).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 19 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2480 (second variation 1) to step 2484 (second variation 1). That is, after turning off the special game in step 2430, in step 2480 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the special game end command is a long release command (end demo set in step 1810). It is a command related to time information, and it is determined whether or not it is a command related to the fact that the end demo time is 10 seconds, which is a long time. In the case of Yes in step 2480 (second modification 1), in step 2482 (second modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S notifies that the consecutive game continuation image (the transition to the probability variation gaming state after completion of the special game) is made. For example, a command for displaying “Congratulations! Still more!” Is displayed for a long time (10 seconds in this example), and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2900). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2480 (second variation 1), that is, if the special game end command is a short release command, in step 2484 (second variation 1), the extended game end image (probability after the end of special game) This is an effect to notify that the game does not shift to the variable game state. For example, a command for displaying “see again!” For a short time (3 seconds in this example) is set, and the next processing (step 2900) Process). Although the special game end demonstration time is long (10 seconds) and short time (3 seconds), the presentation mode executed at the special game end demonstration time is different. Production mode (production tendency) in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game when the game end demo time is long (10 seconds), and special when the special game end demo time is short (3 seconds) It is configured to be the same as the effect mode (effect tendency) in the time-saving game state after the game ends.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, a special game end demonstration time is provided after the final round in the special game ends, and is specified by the special game being executed. Since the period of the special game end demonstration time differs depending on whether or not a game ball has entered the area C22, it is highly beneficial for the player when entering the specific area C22. While performing an effect that congratulates the player of time, if the player does not enter the specific area C22, it is not highly profitable for the player. It can be a gaming machine with more inflection.

  In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, a special game start demonstration time may be provided. In the special game start demonstration time, it is not determined whether or not a game ball enters the specific area C22 in the special game. Therefore, the special game start demonstration time depends on whether or not the specific area C22 has entered. This period will not be different. However, the special game start demonstration time may be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the special game. For example, when the special game is won in the non-time-reduced game state, 10 seconds (right to the player) If the special game is won in the non-time-reduced gaming state, it is 3 seconds (the effect is not to prompt the player to perform a right-handed stroke). For a short time).

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment and the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that enters the specific area C22 during execution of the special game and shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends. Although illustrated, such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the second embodiment and the modified example 1 from the second embodiment. Accordingly, the configuration having the specific area C22 different from the second embodiment and the first modification from the second embodiment is referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment. Hereinafter, only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail. Describe.

  First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1600 in FIG. 6 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1609-1 (second variation 2) and step 3100 (second variation 2). That is, in step 1608, a special game start display instruction command to the sub-side After the setting, in step 1609-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration execution permission flag, and proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). On the other hand, also in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 3100 (second modification 2). Next, in step 3100 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a start demonstration time control process to be described later, and proceeds to step 1610.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of Step 1850 (second) in FIG. 36 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, the differences from the second embodiment are step 1851-1 (second modification 2), step 1899-1 (second modification 2) to step 1899-7 (second modification 2), that is, step. In 1851-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the distribution demo time is off. If Yes in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 1852, and if No, the process moves to step 1854. After setting the long release pattern at step 1856 or after setting the short release pattern at step 1858, at step 1899-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M It is determined whether or not the first main game symbol (first main game big hit symbol). In the case of Yes in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in step 1899-2 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the distribution start demonstration timer for a long time {step 1899-3 (second variation 2). It is a time value that is longer than the time value set in Variant 2), and in this example, 10 seconds} is set and the process proceeds to Step 1899-4 (Second Variant 2). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in other words, when the stop symbol is the second main game symbol (second main game big hit symbol), step 1899-3 (second variation 2) ), The CPUMC of the main control board M is a time value that is shorter than the time value set in the distribution start demo timer {step 1899-2 (second variation 2). Seconds} is set and the process proceeds to Step 1899-4 (second variable 2). Next, in step 1899-4 (second modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M relates to the determined distribution start demonstration time information (a command to the sub side, and the special game being executed is changed). Set the command related to the time value of minute demo time. Next, in step 1899-5 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution demo time flag (the flag that starts the distribution demo time when it is turned on). Move to 1899-6 (2nd change 2). Note that if the answer is No in step 1851-1 (second modification 2), the process proceeds to step 1899-6 (second modification 2). Next, in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the distribution start demonstration timer is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1899-6 (second modification 2), in step 1899-7 (second modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during the distribution demonstration time, and proceeds to step 1860. . In addition, in step 1899-6 (2nd modification 2), when it is No, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1634). As described above, in the second modified example from the second embodiment, the distribution start demonstration time, which is the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, is the second when the first main game side is a big hit. The time is longer than when the main game is a big hit.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a configuration diagram of an example of a special winning opening opening pattern. The jackpot symbol in the second embodiment is a total of six types of jackpots, three types of first main game jackpot symbol "4A · 5A · 7A" and second main game jackpot symbol "4B · 5B · 7B" There are only two types of open patterns in one round: “short open = 500 ms open → closed” and “long open = 30000 ms open → closed”. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the grand prize opening (the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is not limited to this, the number of types may be increased, and the opening pattern may be opened multiple times in one round. An opening pattern (for example, “10000 ms opening → 10000 ms closing → 10000 ms opening → closing”) may be used. Here, in the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, only the second main game length opening big hit “5B / 7B” has a long opening of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in all rounds (16R). . In addition, the distribution game execution round in which the second grand prize opening C20 is to be opened is the fourth round, and in the other rounds, the first big prize opening is to be opened. Moreover, in all the big hits, the number of rounds to be executed is four or more rounds, and the distribution game execution round is always executed. In this way, there is a short opening round in the first main game length opening big hit “5A · 7A” (2R), while the second main gaming length opening big hit “5B · 7B” There is no short opening round, that is, the number of short opening rounds is such that the first main game length opening big hit is more than the second main game length opening big hit.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the start demonstration time control process related to the subroutine of Step 3100 (second variation 2) in FIG. 47 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the start demonstration execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts by setting the start demo time (3 seconds in this example) in the start demo time timer. Next, in step 3016, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the second main game big hit symbol (3B, 5B and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the second long release command (the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol is started as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. Command) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the first main game length open big hit symbol (5A and 7A in this example). To do. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the first long release command (the second main winning opening in the first main game big win symbol as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. A command related to the start of a special game in which C20 is long open is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3110, in other words, the case where the stopped big hit symbol is not the first main game length open big hit symbol, that is, the first main game short open symbol (2A in this example). In step 3114, the CPU MC of the main control board M uses the first short opening command (the second main winning opening C20 in the first main gaming big hit symbol is short opened as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side. The command related to the start of the special game is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116.

  Next, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined start demonstration time information to the sub side. Next, in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration execution flag, and proceeds to step 3120. Note that if the result of Step 3102 is No, the process proceeds to Step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the start demonstration time timer is zero. In the case of Yes in step 3120, in step 3122, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration execution flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration execution permission flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1610). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3120, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1610).

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 19 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2403-1 (second modification 2) to step 2403-11 (second modification 2) and step 2350 (second modification 2), that is, special game in step 2402. After turning off the middle flag, in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the special demonstration start flag (turning on the special game start demonstration time. It is determined whether or not (flag) is off. If YES in step 2403-1 (second variable 2), the flow advances to step 2404. Next, in the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2403-2 (second modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) in the start demonstration display timer and sets the timer. Start. Next, in step 2403-3 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the start demonstration flag. Next, in step 2350 (second modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a start demonstration effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 2403-4 (second modification 2). Note that the process proceeds to step 2403-4 (second modification 2) also in the case of No in step 2403-1 (second modification 2).

  Next, in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the start demonstration time timer is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2403-4 (second modification 2), in step 2403-5 (second modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the start demonstration flag, and proceeds to step 2412. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-4 (second modification 2), the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2900).

  Also, after setting the command related to the big hit start display in step 2414, in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the command related to the distribution start demonstration time information from the main side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S has a long distribution start demonstration time (in this example, 10 seconds). ). In the second modification from the second embodiment, there are two types of time values for the distribution start demonstration time, that is, the start demonstration time of the distribution game execution round, which are long time and short time. In the case of Yes in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-8 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not easily enter the ball at the long distribution start demonstration time. A notification effect (an effect that does not definitely notify the player whether or not the second big prize opening C20 becomes long open in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and in step 2403-10 (second variable 2) Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-9 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S enters the ball at the distribution start demonstration time which becomes a short time. An easy notification effect (an effect for definitive notification to the player that the second grand prize winning opening C20 will be long open in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and the process proceeds to Step 2403-10 (second variable 2). To do. In addition, also when No is determined in step 2403-6 (second modification 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second modification 2). As described above, in the second modified example from the second embodiment, in the sorting game execution round related to the first main game symbol, the easy entry not-notification effect is executed, and the distribution game related to the second main game symbol is executed. In the execution round, it is configured to execute the easy entry notification effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be made different depending on the gaming state, which effect is executed, that is, the easy entry non-notification effect or the easy entry notification effect. For example, in the distribution game execution round related to the long open big hit (5A, 7A) on the first main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state and the non-stochastic game state, In the distributed game execution round related to the long open big hit (3B / 5B / 7B) on the second main game side won in the time shortening game state and the probability variation game state, it is configured to execute the easy entry notification effect. Also good. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute the ending effect as described above in this embodiment, and in such a case, it is not easy to enter the ball during the special game that executes the ending effect. It is preferable that the effect and the easy entry notification effect are displayed so as not to stand out for the player. With such a configuration, attention can be paid more to an ending effect with a high degree of difficulty. Similarly, it is configured to enable execution of an on-reserved rensou effect that informs the player that there is a hold that is a big hit among the suspends that are present in the special game. Even when it is executed, it may be configured to display the easy entry non-notification effect and the easy entry notification effect so as not to stand out for the player.

  Next, in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game related to the second main game length opening big hit symbol ( The second main game length opening jackpot symbols are 3B, 5B and 7B). If YES in step 2403-10 (second modification 2), the flow advances to step 2416. On the other hand, if step 2403-10 (second variation 2) is No, in step 2403-11 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the winning number (short open). In the case of a big hit where there is a round, the number of rounds is not notified), and the process proceeds to step 2426. As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the second main game length opening big hit symbol, which is a big hit symbol in which the first big winning port C10 or the second big winning port C20 becomes long open in all rounds. In the big hit, the round that is being executed is notified at the time of execution of each round (the number of rounds currently being executed is notified), while the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize is received in any round In the big hit with the short opening of the mouth C20 (or in the big hit with the first big winning opening C10 having a short opening), the round currently being executed is not notified when each round is executed. Further, when not informing of the round being executed, an object image (for example, a treasure box, etc.) corresponding to the number of rounds (actual number of rounds) is displayed instead of the display of informing the round. You may comprise so that it may display additionally every time the round which becomes long open of the big winning opening C20 is performed. Also, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of object images are displayed at the start of a special game (or immediately after the start of a special game), and an effect is ensured to ensure that the number of rounds corresponding to the number of the object images is long open. May be. In addition, when the special game in which all the rounds are long open, the effect may not be executed or may be executed, but if not executed, the number of currently executed rounds is displayed. It is desirable. In any round, in the big hit where the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20 is short open (or in the big hit having a round in which the first big prize opening C10 is short open) The first grand prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20 may be configured to notify only the number of rounds that are long open (for example, “first R = long open, second R = short open, third R = long). In the case of “open”, the third round is notified of the second round, etc.). It should be noted that the performance performed during the execution of the special game is not limited to this, for example, a big hit within the hold in a predetermined round (or a distribution game execution round) after the distribution game execution round during the execution of the special game In the case where there is a hold to become, it may be configured so that a hold-in-range resort production that notifies that it is deterministic that it will be a big hit can be executed. In the case of such a configuration, when the on-hold consecutive resort production is executed in the round before the distribution game execution round, the game state after the end of the special game is not determined (to the specific area C22). Therefore, there is a possibility that the symbol variation related to the hold subject to notification will be lost, even though the big hit is announced. The execution timing of the villa effect is preferably after entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round or after the distribution game execution round is completed. In addition, the distribution game execution round may be any round, for example, the first round may be configured as the distribution game execution round (applicable even when there is one big prize opening). .

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the start demonstration effect execution process according to the subroutine of Step 2350 (second modification 2) in FIG. 51 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the second long release command is received from the main side. If Yes in step 2352, the process proceeds to step 2360. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first long release command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S informs that the final prize winning lottery C20 is long open in the special effect execution lottery to be won at 1/5 (in the special game being executed). Or lottery). Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the confirmed effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2358, the process proceeds to step 2360. Next, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a long release confirmation notification effect (the effect of notifying that the second big prize opening C20 is long open in the special game being executed) as a start demonstration effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 2403-4 (second modification 2)}. In the case of No in step 2354 (when the first short release command is received from the main side) or in the case of No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the long release is present as the start demonstration effect. The notification effect (the effect that does not notify whether the second big prize opening C20 is long open or short open in the special game being executed) is executed, and the next process {the process of step 2403-4 (second modification 2)} Migrate to In the special game start demonstration time at which the start demonstration effect will be executed, as in the distribution start demonstration time, the second main game is 10 seconds for the big hit (higher percentage) on the first main game side. You may comprise so that it may be 3 seconds in the big hit (a high ratio) of the side.

  By configuring as described above, in the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, in the special game related to the second main game side, the second big prize opening in the distribution game execution round in all special games In the special game related to the first main game side where C20 is long open, a special game in which the second big prize opening C20 is long open and a special game in which a short open is provided in the distribution game execution round, In the special game on the second main game side, the fact that the second big prize opening C20 is open for a long time is announced at the start demonstration time of the special game, while in the special game on the first main game side, the second big prize is won. Even if it is a special game in which the mouth C20 is opened for a long time, it is configured to have a case in which a notification is made that the second big prize opening C20 is to be opened in the special demonstration start time. It is certain to enter the specific area C22 In a special game on the second main game side, the player is informed that the second big prize opening C20 is long open, while entering the specific area C22 during the special game is not definitive. In the special game on the game side, the specific area C22 is configured by performing an effect that basically asks the player whether or not the second grand prize opening C20 is long open, but may be informed definitely. It is possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that can execute an effect corresponding to the ease of entering the ball.

  In the second modification from the second embodiment, it is configured that the easy entry notification effect and the easy entry non-notification effect are executed at the distribution start demonstration time, but before the distribution game execution round. It may be executed during execution of a round to be executed (may be executed over a plurality of rounds), or may be executed during execution of a sorting game execution round.

(Third embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the game ball is placed in the specific area C22 during the special game so that the game shifts to the probability variation game state after the special game ends. The game performance that is highly profitable for the player by entering the ball is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that provides such game play is defined as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a basic structure of the front side of a gaming machine in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the third embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and due to the presence of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port A10 is arranged. The upper part of the game start opening B10 is blocked. Both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) are both the second main game start opening B10. The game ball that is guided to the left side of the game area D30 (referenced from the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, and the game ball that flows down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area). The ball is configured not to be guided to the first main game start opening A10. Note that both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) are the first main game start opening A10. It may be configured to be guided to.

  In addition, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. While the game balls flowing down on the right side (based on the center of the game area) are difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10, each start port is arranged so as to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10. Good. It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  Here, in the third embodiment, the auxiliary game start port H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced from the center of the game area) is easily guided and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30. {However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is configured so that the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30, respectively.)}.

  Next, a first grand prize winning port C10 and a second grand prize winning port C20 are arranged on the upper right side of the out port D36, and the game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) Before reaching the out opening D36, it is configured to easily pass through an area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged.

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. The winning opening corresponding to the main game is located at the upper right of the opening D36 and at the upper right of the first big winning opening C10. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). The mouth solenoid C26), the upper shielding member C24 that can start driving at the start of the small hit game and hinder the flow down of the gaming ball to the lower shielding member C25, and the driving when the gaming machine is turned on. The lower shielding member C25 that can hinder the flow to the V winning opening C27, the V winning opening C27 that is an opportunity to shift to the special game by entering the ball at the small hit game, and the V winning opening C27 A V winning opening entrance detecting device C27s for detecting the entering of a game ball, a second large winning opening outlet C23 for discharging a gaming ball that has entered the second large winning opening C20, and a second large To detect a game ball entering the winning port outlet C23 Comprising a second bonus prize hole discharge detection device C23S, a. Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10). The internal structure of the second big prize opening C20 will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 54 is an operation diagram relating to the second big prize opening C20 in the third embodiment, and more specifically, the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding provided in the second big prize opening C20. It is an operation view related to whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 based on the opening mode and the closing mode of the member C25. In the third embodiment, if the game ball continues to be fired toward the second grand prize opening C20 during the small hit game (if it continues to hit the right), the second big prize opening C20 is entered. The game ball is configured to enter a plurality of balls {for example, the second big prize opening C20 (second big prize mouth electric accessory C21d) is opened as “0.2 second open → 0.8 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed ”. Therefore, whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 depends on whether the game ball in the second large winning opening C20 is the upper shielding member C24 or not. It is determined by whether or not the opening timing with the lower shielding member C25 is well matched. Hereinafter, the action of the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game will be described in detail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the second grand prize opening C20 has an inside (as a flow path for game balls inside the second big prize opening C20) and enters the second big prize opening C20. The second grand prize opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the ball, the V winning opening C27, the V winning opening winning detection apparatus C22s for detecting the winning at the V winning opening C27, and the V winning opening C27 are not entered. A second grand prize port outlet C23, which is a discharge path for the game balls, and a second big prize port discharge detection device C23s for detecting a ball entering the second major prize port outlet C23, A lower shielding member C25 provided above the V winning opening C27 and an upper shielding member C24 provided above the lower shielding member C25. The upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are separated from the game board ( Projected state (advanced state) as seen from the player Therefore, the fall of the game ball is not inhibited by the closed state in which the fall of the game ball can be or can be easily inhibited and the state in which the game ball is retracted into the game board (the back side when viewed from the player). It is configured to be able to take an open state where it is possible or difficult to block (a game ball can drop) (this is a configuration like a so-called Vero-type attacker). More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the upper shielding member C24 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or is difficult to reach the lower shielding member C25, and when the upper shielding member C24 is in the opened state. The game ball can reach or easily reach the lower shielding member C25, and when the lower shielding member C25 is closed, the game ball cannot reach or reach the V winning opening C27, and the lower shielding member When C25 is in the open state, the game ball is configured to reach or easily reach the V prize opening C27. Next, a specific flow path of a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game has passed through the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s and is then closed in the closed state. It is guided to the member C24, and stops (is placed on the upper shielding member C24) in a region formed by the upper shielding member C24 and the inner wall surface of the second large winning opening C20 (referred to as a retaining region). In the present embodiment, since the stopping area is configured so that only one game ball can be placed, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), a certain gaming ball is placed in the stopping area. When the game ball is placed, the game ball guided into the second grand prize opening C20 after the placement timing of the game ball collides with the game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24. Thus, the flow path reaching the second grand prize port outlet detection device C23s and the second major prize port outlet C23 without passing through the upper shielding member C24 (it is impossible or difficult to enter the V prize port C27). The stopping area is configured such that the certain game ball is not pulled out of the stopping area due to an impact when the other game ball collides. Have been). Here, the right part of FIG. 54 (a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the XX cross section in FIG. 54 (a). As shown in the sectional view, in FIG. 54 (a), the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are both closed (projected from the game board (toward the player as viewed from the player)) (the sectional view). In this case, it is understood that a game ball can be placed on the upper shielding member C24.

  In the third embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 is set to be opened after a certain time from the start of the small hit game (in this example, five seconds after the start of the small hit game). C25 is configured to repeat the transition between the closed state and the open state at a constant cycle (in this example, a cycle of 4 seconds) from when the power is turned on (the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 is periodic). Below, whether or not to enter the V winning opening C27 is mainly determined by the timing at which the upper shielding member C24 is opened (in other words, the timing at which the small hit game starts) (the lower shielding member C25 has the lower shielding member C25). The game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 when the small hit game is started in which the timing when the upper shielding member C24 is opened substantially coincides with the timing when the upper shielding member C24 is opened.

  The third embodiment is merely an example, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in a state in which the fall of the game ball cannot be inhibited or difficult, and in a state in which the fall of the game ball can be inhibited or easily inhibited. As long as the transition can be made, any structure may be used, and other configurations are not limited at all.

  In the third embodiment, the two shielding members, the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25, are provided to inhibit the game ball from entering the V winning opening C27. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the entrance of the game ball to V winning opening C27 may be inhibited with a shielding member. Also, in the gaming machine shown in the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the specific area is changed to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished. You may comprise so that the shielding member which inhibits the entrance of the game ball to C22 may be provided. In such a configuration, the opening mode of the shielding member may be configured to differ depending on the jackpot symbol that triggered the jackpot, and in such a configuration, (1) shielding in the distributed game execution round As a member release mode, the shielding member changes from the closed state to the open state 50 ms after the distribution game execution round start timing or at the distribution game execution round start timing regardless of the big hit symbol. (2) Distribution game execution round The shielding member may be changed from the open state to the closed state at a timing 200 ms after the end timing of (or depending on the jackpot symbol, there may be a case after 200 ms or after 3000 ms). Due to the fact that there is a timing for the shielding member to be released regardless of the big hit symbol, the shielding part is started after the distribution game execution round is started. There can be first than the period until the start of the opening, towards the period from the distribution game execution round is completed until the shielding member is last in closing is configured to be a long period of time.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in the third embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 1700 (third), step 1750 (third), step 3450 (third), and step 1950 (third). That is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 1700 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1750 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an upper shielding member drive control process which will be described later. Next, in step 3450 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a lower shielding member drive control process described later. Next, in step 1950 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a V winning opening entrance determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1997.

  Next, FIG. 56 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart. The difference from this embodiment is step 1403 (third), 1410-3 (third), step 1434 (third) and step 1436 (third), that is, step 1403 (third). The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variation start condition is satisfied (in the third embodiment, the fact that the small hit game is not being executed is added as the variation start condition). If yes in step 1403 (third), the process proceeds to step 1405, and if no, the process proceeds to step 1419. Further, after determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1410-3 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, and the gaming state. The variation mode (or variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

  If the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol in step 1430, in step 1434 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1434 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag in step 1436 (third), and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1434 (third), the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, FIG. 57 (the main game table 1 and the main game table 2) is an example of the first main game success lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success lottery table MN11ta-B) in the third embodiment. It is. In the third embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the table contents to be referred to are different only depending on whether the symbol variation related to the first main game side or the symbol variation related to the second main game side. Yes. The first main game side and the second main game side are configured to be able to win a small hit, and the result of the lottery on the second main game side is almost (with a probability of 1020/1024). Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. In addition, when winning a small hit, the first main game side is determined to be one type, and the second main game side is determined so that one main game symbol is determined as a small hit symbol from two types of main game symbols. ing. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the state and the selection rate of the variation mode and / or the selection rate of the main game symbol are different from those before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (third) in FIG. 18 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1681-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the special game triggered by entering the V winning opening C27 (in the third embodiment, the small hit) A special game is executed when a game ball enters the V prize opening C27 during the game). In the case of Yes in step 1681-1, in step 1681-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a jackpot symbol in which the stop symbol shifts to a time-short jackpot symbol (time saving game state after the execution of the special game is completed. Then, it is determined whether or not 4B · 5A · 5B · 7A · 7B). In the case of Yes in Step 1681-2, the process proceeds to Step 1681-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1681-1, in step 1681-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M will make a transition to the time-reduced game state after completion of execution of the special game. It is a small hit symbol that triggers the transition to, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by 7AK · 7BK). If Yes in step 1681-4, the process proceeds to step 1681-5.

  Next, in step 1681-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in Step 1681-6 and Step 1681-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing {step 1700 (third) processing}. To do. In the case of No in step 1681-2, in other words, when the stop symbol is 4A, which is a short-time and big hit symbol, or in case of No in step 1681-4, in other words, it is triggered by 2BK which is a short and short-time hit symbol. Even when the special game is over, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1700 (third) process}. Note that the processing related to the limited frequency (step 1411, subroutine of step 1450, step 1413, step 1431) has been deleted.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1700 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1701, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a discharge waiting flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1722, which will be described later, that is, a scheduled small hit game (especially the second large game that was Whether or not the flag turned on during the discharge waiting period (discharge waiting time) of the game balls remaining in the second large winning opening C20 after the completion of the execution of the winning opening C20 opening pattern) is off. Determine. If Yes in step 1701, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If YES in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, at step 1705, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the opening pattern of the second big prize opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, “0.2 second release → 0. 8 seconds closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed ”, and if the game ball continues to be launched toward the second grand prize opening C20, Set up to enter multiple balls). Next, in step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M launches a small-hit execution start command (a command indicating that a small-hit game has been started, and the player releases a game ball toward the second big prize opening C20. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20 and starts the small hit game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1709, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1712. In the third embodiment, the discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, thereby discharging after a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) from the start of the small hit game. The waiting time is configured to end. {Of course, the method for measuring the discharge waiting time is not limited to this. For example, the scheduled small hit game (especially, the scheduled second big prize opening C20 Measurement may be started after the execution of the release pattern)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1702, in Step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If YES in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712.

  Next, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a game ball winning (winning) in the second big winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1712, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the second big winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1714, the process proceeds to step 1718. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1712 or step 1714, in step 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the small hit game timer MP41t and a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) for opening the big winning opening has elapsed. Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1716, the process proceeds to step 1718.

  Next, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the driving of the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d and closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge waiting flag (the discharge waiting time is started from this processing execution timing), and the process proceeds to step 1724. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1701, the process proceeds to Step 1724.

  Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (10 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 1724, in step 1725, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge waiting flag. Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit gaming timer MP41t. Next, in step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750 (third)}. Note that the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1750 (third)} also in the case of No in step 1710, step 1716, or step 1724.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the upper shielding member in a predetermined drive pattern (in this example, a pattern in which “5 seconds closed → 1 second opened → 24 seconds closed” is repeated). The driving of C24 is started, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). Although there is no problem if the driving pattern of the upper shielding member C24 is changed, in this example, the game ball receives a V prize only when the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 coincides with the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Since it is configured to be able to enter the entrance C27, it is impossible to enter the V winning entrance C27 because the opening time is set to a long time such as 3 seconds or the opening is not released for 10 seconds or more from the start of driving. It is desirable not to configure. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the upper shielding member C24 in the closed state (initial position), ends the driving, and performs the next process {step 3450 (third). The process proceeds to. As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 starts driving with the start of the small hit game (the opening of the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit) as an opportunity, and the end of the small hit game is triggered. Is configured to end driving, and the small hitting game ends before driving once with the opening pattern of the upper shielding member C24, and the driving of the upper shielding member C24 ends. . Since the small hit game has a discharge waiting time, even after the opening of the second big prize opening C20 related to the small hit game ends, the small hit game does not end until the discharge standby time ends. It will be.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the lower shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of Step 3450 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3452, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the lower shielding member C25 with a constant driving pattern (in this example, a pattern in which “closed for 3 seconds → opened for 1 second” in this example) after the power is turned on. , The process proceeds to {the process of step 1950 (third)}. As described above, the upper shielding member C24 is configured to start driving when the small hit game starts, whereas the lower shielding member C25 is configured to start driving when the gaming machine is turned on.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination process according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a conditional device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 during the discharge waiting time. In this case, it is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on in this case is off. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M is within the V winning opening effective period (a period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time relating to the small hit game). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect described later) to the sub main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1960, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation reservation flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the V winning opening valid period (a period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hit game). It is determined whether or not the process has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Note that if the answer is No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Further, in the case of No in step 1956, in other words, in the case where the risk of fraudulent entry such as a game ball entering the V prize opening C27 is increased even though the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable that the error processing is appropriately performed. The number of rounds of special games related to entering the V winning opening C27 is “15R”, and the total flow of “special game related to entering the small winning game → V winning opening C27” is totaled. Then, “1R” of the number of rounds related to the small hit game and “15R” of the number of rounds related to the special game are “16R”.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, a control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 63 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 9A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the gaming machine is powered on. Changes from the present embodiment are step 2001 (third) and step 2003 (third). That is, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2001 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets and starts the power-on timer SM24t. The power-on timer SM24t is provided to grasp the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Next, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, when RAM clear information is received → on the sub side) When the RAM is initialized and various information commands are received, the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the number of holds (for example, the drawing hold counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). In addition, the information related to the performance and special symbols being executed is not restored, and the “preparing” screen is displayed until the start of the next change. Thereafter, the processing shifts to a loop processing that repeatedly executes (b), which is the CPUSC repetition processing routine of the sub-control board S. Changes from the present embodiment are step 2500 (third) and step 2550 (third). That is, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described above. Next, in step 2500 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a V winning detection effect display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2400. Further, after executing the special game related display control process in step 2400, in step 2550 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a small hit game related display control process to be described later, and proceeds to step 2900. . In addition, the stay stage determination process of step 2050 is deleted.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2500 (third) in FIG. 63 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit execution start command (a command relating to the start of the small hit game) has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prompts a right-handed instruction effect {emergence of a game ball (execution of right-handed) toward the second big prize opening C20 during the small hit game. The command related to the effect} is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2506. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2502, the process proceeds to step 2506. Next, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S notifies the player that the game ball has entered the V winning detection command (V winning port C27) from the main side. It is determined whether or not a command for executing the V winning detection effect, which is an effect of No. 1, has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the V winning detection effect (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2506, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400). The V winning detection effect is an effect of notifying the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 and then a special game will be executed, so that the effect content congratulates the player. The content and the content of the effect of notifying that the player is highly profitable are desirable. For example, “V” is displayed on the effect display device SG over the entire display area SG10.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the small hit game related display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2550 (third) in FIG. 63 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the small hitting flag is off. If Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hitting start command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the small hit start display (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). .

  Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the small hitting medium flag, and proceeds to step 2564. Note that if No in step 2552, the process proceeds to step 2564. Next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit end command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2564, in step 2566, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the small hit end display (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). . Next, in step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the small hitting flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). Note that if the result is No in step 2554 or step 2564, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Function)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation related to winning in the V winning opening C27 in the third embodiment will be described. First, in the figure, when the hold related to the small hit occurs, the upper shielding member C24 is opened after the hold related to the small hit occurs, which is calculated based on the number of holds at the time of determining the variation time. It is an operation diagram illustrating the relationship between the time until the start (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “upper shielding member opening arrival time”) and the ease of entering the V winning opening C27. . In this example, a case where a hold related to a small hit occurs during a certain symbol change in which there are two holds related to a loss is illustrated. In this example, the reservation order of the reservation is “first hold → second hold → third hold” (the third hold is a hold related to the small hit). In the following, the time from the occurrence of the third hold (= hold for small hits) to the end of the changing symbol fluctuation is the same (2 seconds), and the first hold of the symbol change start of the change The random number of the fluctuation mode determination random number of the first hold to the third hold is the same (for example, the random number value of the change mode determination random number of the first hold and the second hold is 799, and the change mode determination random number of the third hold Is a random value of 1023).

  First, when a hold related to a small hit occurs during a symbol change where there are two holds related to a loss, the upper shielding member release arrival time is caused by a third hold (= hold related to a small hit). The time until the end of the changing symbol change from the first to the second; the first hold time; the second hold time; the third hold (= holding related to small hits); the small hit game start And the time from when the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started to the total time.

  Next, while referring to the table at the top of the figure, there are two holds related to loss (first hold and second hold). In the situation where it occurred, as a pattern A, when the release of the game ball was stopped after the occurrence of the third hold (= holding related to the small hit) {particularly after the third hold (= holding related to the small hit) occurred When no new hold occurs} When the upper shielding member release arrival time and pattern B continue to fire game balls after the occurrence of the third hold (= hold for small hits) {in particular, the third The upper shielding member opening arrival time is illustrated as an example of a case where a new hold occurs after a hold (= hold related to small hits) occurs.

  In pattern A, after the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs, no new hold occurs, and when the variation time related to the first hold is determined, the number of holds is two {second hold and second hold 3 hold (= hold for small hits)}, and at the time of determining the variation time for the second hold, the number of hold is 1 {third hold (= hold for small hits)} and the third hold (= At the time of determining the variation time related to (holding related to small hits), the number of holdings is 0. In this case, referring to the lottery table for determining the first main game variation mode in FIG. 13, the time from the occurrence of the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) to the end of the changing symbol change is 2 seconds. The fluctuation time of the first hold is 5 seconds; the fluctuation time of the second hold is 10 seconds; the change time of the third hold (= hold according to the small hit) is 60 seconds; The time from the start to the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shielding member opening arrival time is 82 seconds.

  Next, in pattern B, after the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs, two new holds occur after the start of the first hold symbol change and before the start of the second hold symbol change. When the variable time for the first hold is determined, the number of holds is two {second hold and third hold (= hold for small hits)}, and when the variable time for the second hold is determined Are three {third hold (= hold on small hits) and two newly generated hold}, and the number of hold is 2 at the time of determining the change time related to the third hold (= hold on small hits) (2 newly generated holds). In this case, referring to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table in FIG. 13, in pattern B, after the third hold (= hold on small hits) occurs, the changing symbol variation is ended. The second hold time is 5 seconds; the second hold time is 5 seconds; and the third hold time (= holding for small hits) is 60 seconds. Yes; The time from the start of the small hit game until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shielding member opening arrival time is 77 seconds.

  Here, as described above, the ease of entering the V winning opening C27 (whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27) depends on the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Is determined by whether or not the two match well. That is, by referring to the upper shield member opening arrival time and the lower shield member C25 opening timing, whether or not it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 in the small hit game according to the pattern A and the pattern B. It is possible to determine in advance.

  Next, the lower part of the figure shows an open mode (closed mode) of the upper shielding member C24 and an open mode (closed mode) of the lower shielding member C25 in each of the pattern A and the pattern B (the lower shielding member C25 is a power source). It is a timing chart showing that opening and closing are repeated periodically from the time of charging. In this timing chart, the elapsed time from the third holding (= holding related to the small hit) occurrence timing is illustrated with reference to the occurrence timing of the third holding (= holding related to the small hit). Moreover, as an open mode (closed mode) of the lower shielding member C25, an elapsed time from the occurrence timing of the third holding (= holding related to the small hit) is “4n + 1 (seconds)” to “4n + 2 (seconds)” (n Is an open state during the period of (integer).

  As shown in this timing chart, in the pattern A, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is a timing at which 82 seconds have elapsed from the occurrence of the third holding (= holding related to the small hit), Taking into account the time required for the game ball to reach the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C24 (0.2 seconds in this example), it becomes 82.2 seconds, and the 82.2 seconds is “4n + 1 (seconds)” "To" 4n + 2 (seconds) "(n is an integer). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 do not coincide with each other, and the gaming ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls due to the opening of the upper shielding member C24. When the lower shield member C25 is reached, the lower shield member C25 is not opened, so that it is difficult to enter the V winning opening C27 located downstream of the lower shield member C25 (the lower shield member C25 causes V The ball entering the winning opening C27 is easily hindered). On the other hand, in the pattern B, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is a timing at which 77 seconds have elapsed from the occurrence timing of the third holding (= holding related to the small hit), and the game ball is placed in the upper shielding member C24. Taking into account the time required to reach the lower shielding member C25 from the position (0.2 seconds in this example), it becomes 77.2 seconds, and the 77.2 seconds are “4n + 1 (seconds)” to “4n + 2 (seconds)”. ”(Where n is an integer) (n = 19). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 coincide with each other, and when the upper shielding member C24 is opened, the game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls and falls. When reaching the shielding member C25, the lower shielding member C25 is opened, so that it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 located downstream of the lower shielding member C25 (some game balls depend on the lower shielding member C25). ) Is difficult to enter the V winning opening C27. In the case of the pattern A and the pattern B, the firing continuation instruction effect described above is executed.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, as pattern A, a new hold does not occur until the symbol variation related to the small hit starts after the hold related to the small hit occurs (the number of holds is two). In such a state, it is difficult to start the symbol fluctuation = the time from when the hold related to the small hit occurs until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is likely to be long) and the pattern B as the small hit A new hold occurs between the occurrence of the hold related to the occurrence of the symbol change related to the small hit (the change in the number of holds is always maintained, and the change is easy to start = small) The opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 may change in the case where the time until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started after the suspension related to hitting is likely to be shortened). Further, the change in the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 can change whether or not the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 match well. When a small win is won, it can be a highly entertaining gaming machine that pays attention to whether or not to enter the V prize opening C27.

  In the third embodiment, all the fluctuation times that can be executed corresponding to the number of holdings at the time of holding are confirmed on the basis of the holding fluctuation mode determination random number that exists at the time when the holding for the small hit occurs. Then, based on the result, the time until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started after the holding for the small hit occurs in advance, and the calculated result and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are calculated. (Furthermore, taking into account the time until the game ball reaches the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C24), it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 in the small hit game Change in the desired number of holdings (to make the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 coincide with the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25). Or) it is possible to predict. In this way, and when the entry to the V winning opening C27 is possible during the small hit game related to the hold at the time of the occurrence of the hold that becomes the small hit, the combination of the variable time that can be entered It may be configured so that the player can be informed of the launching mode of the game ball (or the desired change in the number of holds) that is likely to become a game, and by doing so, it is possible to play a game to the V prize opening C27 in the small hit game. It is possible to create a novel gameability in which whether or not a ball enters can be determined by a player's technical intervention.

  In addition, in 3rd Embodiment, after the holding | maintenance used as a small hit occurs by comprising so that the determined variation | change time may differ with the number of suspension | holdings at the time of determining the variation | change time of a main game symbol. The time until the lower shielding member C25 is opened can be changed, and the technical intervention of the player is possible. However, the time until the lower shielding member C25 is opened after the holding that becomes a small hit occurs. However, the configuration that can be different depending on the technical intervention of the player is not limited to this. For example, (1) When the player presses, the change of the main game symbol is forcibly stopped, and the stop symbol is displayed. A variable shortening button is provided, and the time is made different depending on the timing of pressing the button. (2) Simultaneously execute both main game symbols of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Can be drawn (and If the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol is a small hit symbol, a small hit game related to the small hit symbol is being executed. The period may be configured to temporarily stop the variation time (elapsed variation time) of the first main game symbol, and to make the time different.

  In addition, in 3rd Embodiment, it comprises so that it may have a specific entrance where a small hit game will be started when a game ball enters after the small hit symbol stops, When a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific small hit symbol is stopped, etc.) is satisfied, the timing at which the game ball is fired so that the game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 during execution of the small hit game. Can be executed on the effect display device SG (for example, “If you enter the specific entrance now, you will see a great chance to enter the V prize opening!”). You may comprise.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the specific game state has a probability variation game state in which the winning / failing lottery result is advantageous to the player as compared to the non-probability variation game state, and the second grand prize is won during the special game. The game is configured to have a distribution game execution round that is a round that the mouth C20 opens, and by entering the V winning opening C27 during the distribution game execution round, the state shifts to the probability-variable game state after the special game ends. It may be configured as described above (so-called tamasho game as exemplified in the second embodiment). In addition, in such a configuration, the timing at which the game ball is launched so that the game ball can enter the V prize opening C27 in the distribution game execution round in the round prior to the distribution game execution round is determined. It is desirable to be able to execute an effect informing the player (for example, on the effect display device SG, “If you enter the second big prize opening now, it will be displayed as a big chance of change!”). .

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, an example is given of the gameability in which a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game. It is not limited to only the third embodiment. Therefore, a configuration having a game characteristic in which a special game is executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit game different from the third embodiment is changed from the third embodiment. Only Example 1 will be described in detail below with respect to changes from the third embodiment.

  First, FIG. 67 is a main flowchart showing a main game symbol display process in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. In step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)}, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine, and performs the following process ( The process proceeds to step 1550). In addition, the gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment is configured to be in the order of entering the ball (the order in which the suspension occurs is digested from the previous one).

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 67 in the first modification of the third embodiment. First, a change from the third embodiment is Step 1405-1 (third variation 1), that is, when the variation start condition is satisfied in Step 1403, Step 1405-1 (third variation 1). Thus, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the main game side random number related to the hold that occurred most recently among the holds that have occurred (all holds on the first main game side and the second main game side). The process proceeds to step 1406.

  Next, FIG. 69 is a main game table 3 according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. In the first modification from the third embodiment, in the time-reduced gaming state, the average value of the variation time related to the first main game side is larger than the average value of the variation time related to the second main game side. It has been a long time. In the time-reduced gaming state, the shortest variation time related to the first main game side is longer than the shortest variation time related to the second main game side. That is, in the time-reduced gaming state, the average value of the variation time associated with the big hit on the first main game side is longer than the average value of the variation time associated with the small hit on the second main game side. In the time-reduced gaming state, the shortest variation time related to the big hit on the first main game side is longer than the shortest variation time related to the small hit on the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process in step 1500 in FIG. 68 in the first modification of the third embodiment. The changes in the first modification of the third embodiment are step 1530 (third modification 1) to step 1542 (third modification 1). That is, after turning off the auxiliary game short time flag in step 1518, step 1530 is performed. In (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the second main game short-time counter (counter subtracted only when the second main game symbol variation ends) to zero, and step 1532 (third variation). Move to 1). In addition, also when it is No at step 1510, it transfers to step 1532 (3rd modification 1).

  Next, in step 1532 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the second main game short-time counter is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1532 (second variation 1), in step 1534 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the second main game short-time counter value (in this example, decrement). . Next, in step 1536 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game short-time counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1536 (third variation 1), in step 1538 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 1540 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag. Next, in step 1542 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time reduction counter to zero, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1550). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1532 (third variation 1) or step 1536 (third variation 1), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550). As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the time-count counter value is subtracted between the change of the first main game symbol and the change of the second main game symbol, and only the change of the second main game symbol. The second main game short time counter value is subtracted.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of Step 1650 (third) in FIG. 17 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 1682-1 (third variation 1) to step 1682-4 (third variation 1), that is, in step 1681-1, the player enters the V winning opening C27. If it is not after the end of the special game as an opportunity, in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol that is a long / short / big hit symbol (a big hit symbol with a relatively large number of short / short times) In this example, 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A and 7B) are determined. If YES in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1681-5, and if NO in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), in other words, the stop symbol is a short-time and short-term hit symbol ( In this example, in the case of 4A), the CPUMC of the main control board M is elected in the current non-time-saving game state in the case of 4A). It is determined whether or not the special game has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1682-2 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times) as the time reduction number counter value. Next, in step 1682-4 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (10 times in this example) as the second main game short time counter value, and step 1681-6 Migrate to If the answer is No in step 1682-2 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1681-5. By configuring in this way, when winning a short time bonus game in a non-time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game is the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The game symbol is configured to end when either the total number of game symbol variations is 30 or the second main game symbol variation is 10 times. In addition, if you win a short-time / short-term bonus symbol in the time-reduced gaming state (including the time-reduced gaming state after the special game related to the short-time / short-time bonus symbol), 100 special time-reduced gaming states after the end of the special game (The sum of the number of times of variation of the first main game symbol and the number of times of variation of the second main game symbol ends at 100 times).

  By configuring as described above, when the short and short bonus winning symbol is won, the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game includes the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol. The second main game side in the time-reduced game state is configured to end when either the total of 30 times or the number of times the second main game symbol changes is 10 is satisfied. In the case of a game that is changed 10 times by the symbol variation of the first game, even if the symbol variation on the first main game side is mistakenly executed, the second main game short time counter does not subtract, By configuring so that the game can be continued without losing the right to be changed ten times by the symbol change on the main game side, a more user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the game is such that the special game is started by entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit, but the configuration of the gaming machine providing the small hit is limited to this. Not. Therefore, a configuration having a small hit different from the third embodiment is referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 72 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is that there is one large winning opening, and the V winning opening C27, the upper shielding member C24, and the lower shielding member C25 are not provided. That is, the entry determination process is not executed.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 72 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is step 1249 (fourth), that is, if the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in step 1249 (fourth). Based on the winning symbol and the gaming state, the release mode of the electric accessory is determined, a predetermined time is set in the release timer, and the process proceeds to Step 1234.

  Next, FIG. 74 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 10 in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart. The difference from the third embodiment is 1410-3 (fourth), step 1500 (fourth), and step 3350 (fourth). That is, after the stop symbol is determined in step 1410-2, step 1410- 3 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol determination lottery result, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the game state, Based on the set limited frequency type, the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to Step 1414. Further, after the condition device flag is turned on in step 1432, or after the small hit flag is turned on in step 1436 (third), or in step 1434 (fourth), the stop symbol is not a small hit symbol (losing) If it is a symbol), in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process to be described later. Next, in step 3350 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency end determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 75 (main game table 3) is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the fourth embodiment. is there. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the main game symbol variation mode (variation time) is determined based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result, the main game short time flag state, and the limited frequency type that is set. It is configured to be. That is, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time becomes relatively long, and when the main game short flag is on (relative to the short game state) The variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined. Further, as shown in the variation mode at the time of losing and small hit, when the second limited frequency is set (for example, after the special game related to the big hit symbol “7B”), the zero limited frequency, The first limited frequency is set so that a relatively short variation mode is selected as compared with the case where the first limited frequency is set (for example, after the special game related to the big hit symbol other than the big hit symbol “7B”). In particular, in the case of small hits, the difference in the variation time between the second limited frequency and the first limited frequency is large, and the difference is the second limited frequency and the first limited when lost. It is relatively larger than the difference of the fluctuation time (average value) at the time of frequency. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but needless to say, it may be configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. Absent. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side When the change is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished}. In addition, although the variation mode related to the small hit on the first main game side is configured with only one type, it is not limited thereto, and a plurality of types of variation modes may be provided (particularly, the game state and the set). It is preferable that a different variation mode can be selected based on the limited frequency type being used).

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1508, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value (remaining short time count) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in step 1516 and step 1518, and proceeds to the next processing {step 3350 (fourth) processing}. To do. Note that, also in the case of No in step 1508, step 1510, or step 1514, the processing proceeds to the next processing {step 3350 (fourth) processing}.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of limited frequency end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c (a counter that manages the number of changes in the main game symbol in the limited frequency state) is greater than zero. If Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 3356, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value (remaining limited frequency count) of the limited frequency counter MN52c is zero.

  In the case of Yes in step 3356, in step 3358, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently set limited frequency type is the second limited frequency. In the case of Yes in step 3358, in step 3360, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type. Next, in step 3362, the CPUMC of the main control board M has the first specific number of times (for example, 65535 times as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, but continues the first limited frequency until the next big hit. There may be an extremely large value or ∞ times other than this), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). As described above, when a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 70 times described later) has elapsed in the second limited frequency state, the first limited frequency state is entered.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3358, that is, in the 0th limited frequency state (excluded because it is not realistic that the first limited frequency state ends), a predetermined number of fluctuations (described later, for example, 50 If the number of times is equal to the upper limit number of time-saving gaming states), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set limited frequency type (substantially simultaneously, the time-saving gaming state) in step 3364. And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). In addition, also when it is No in step 3352 or step 3356, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (fourth) in FIG. 17 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1653-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a probability variation big hit symbol (for example, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1653-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1655-2.

  Next, in step 1653-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1653-3, in step 1653-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stores in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second specific number of times (for example, 70 times) as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1653-11. In this example, it is configured to shift to the second limited frequency state (a state advantageous to the player) only at the end of the special game related to the big hit on the second main game side, but is not limited to this. . However, by configuring the second main game side to be easier for the player than the first main game side, it is possible for the player to change according to the probability variation game state and / or the time-reduced game state. The advantageous state and the effect overlap, and the excitement of the player can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1653-3, in step 1653-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stores in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M is said to continue the first limited frequency until the next big hit, although the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is the first specific number of times (for example, 65535 times). (It may be an extremely large value or ∞ times other than this), and the process proceeds to step 1653-11.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1653-1, that is, when the special game related to the non-probable variable big hit is over, in step 1653-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the predetermined number of times as the value of the time-count counter MP52c. (For example, 50 times) is set. Next, in step 1653-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the 0th limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stores in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the 0th specific number of times (for example, 50 times equal to the number of time reductions) as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1653-11 To do. That is, the first limited frequency or the second limited frequency is set when shifting to the probability varying gaming state, and the zeroth limited frequency is set when not shifting to the probability varying gaming state.

  Next, in steps 1653-11 and 1653-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next processing (step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the fourth embodiment. In this example, for convenience of explanation, an example is given in which a small hit is regularly generated at an average fluctuation interval (a small hit is generated about once every 11 fluctuations). In addition, the launch interval of the game balls according to the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds per ball (100 balls per minute), and about 1.7 seconds during the opening of the big prize opening C10 related to the small hit game is 1.7 seconds. Three game balls are supposed to enter the big prize opening C10.

  First, as shown in the section (a) of the figure, in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time-reduced gaming state, the difference between the number of game balls fired and the winning ball by entering the first main game start opening A10. As a result, the player's ball will gradually decrease.

  Next, as shown in the section (b) of the figure, during the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, the player's possession is obtained by paying out a prize ball by entering the big prize opening C10. The sphere will increase. Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A” is finished, the gaming state becomes a probability variation / time shortening game state, and the first limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section (c) in the figure, in the probability variation / time-reduced gaming state (first limited frequency), the small hit is with a probability of 97/1024 (= about once every 11 variations). Occurring and paying out a winning ball to the big winning opening C10 related to the small hit, the player's ball is increased (slowly increasing compared to the above-mentioned special game). Here, in the section (c), 33 symbol variations are executed in about 65 seconds (about 117 winning balls are obtained by 3 small hits).

  Next, as shown in the section (d) of the figure, during a special game related to the big hit symbol “7B”, a prize ball by paying a prize to the big prize opening C10 is paid out. The sphere will increase. Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7B” is ended, the game state becomes a probability variation / time reduction game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section (e) of the figure, in the probability variation / time-reduced gaming state (first limited frequency), the small hit is with a probability of 97/1024 (= about once every 11 variations). Occurring and paying out a winning ball to the big winning opening C10 related to the small hit, the player's ball is increased (slowly increasing compared to the above-mentioned special game). Here, in the section (e), 33 symbol variations are executed in about 23 seconds (about 117 winning balls are obtained by 3 small hits). That is, as compared with the first limited frequency, the number of prize balls won (or the expected value) by small hits in the same number of fluctuations is the same, but the time for digesting the fluctuations of the same number of fluctuations is short. Therefore, it can appear as if the player is in a highly profitable state. Although a detailed description is omitted, for example, about 108 game balls are fired in 65 seconds, and about 38 game balls are fired in 23 seconds. Therefore, the lower the rate of entry to the second main game start opening B10, the more game balls launched within the time to digest the same number of fluctuations are lost, so the second limited frequency is more than the first limited frequency It is supplemented that the profit actually becomes high for the player.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a timing chart according to the gaming state transition in the fourth embodiment. First, in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time shortening game state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the 8R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol “5A”. .

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, triggered by the end of the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A”, the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are set, and the first limited frequency is set. Note that, during the time-reduced gaming state, basically, the variation of the second main gaming symbol is executed.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol “BK”, and the small hit game is executed (in the small hit game, the probability variation is changed). Switching between gaming state and time saving gaming state is not performed).

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, a special game of 16R is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol “7B”. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to non-probability change (non-probability variation game state), and the change time is changed to non-time reduction (non-time reduction game state).

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7B” is completed, the game shifts to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and the second limited frequency is set. The Here, the state in which the second limited frequency is set (sometimes referred to as the second limited frequency state) continues for a maximum of 70 fluctuations, and the main game symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation time at the time of loss and small hit) ) Is a state that is likely to be shorter than a state in which the first limited frequency is set (sometimes referred to as a first limited frequency state). In this example, it is assumed that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 70 times (the special game is not executed) within the period of 5 to 6 in the figure.

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the second limited frequency state is terminated when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 70 times in the second limited frequency state, and the state shifts to the first limited frequency state.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the 8R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol “4B”. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to non-probability change (non-probability variation game state), and the change time is changed to non-time reduction (non-time reduction game state).

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “4B” is completed, the game shifts to the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced game state, and the 0th limited frequency is set. (Hereafter, in this example, the time-reduced gaming state and the 0th limited frequency state will continue for a maximum of 50 fluctuations).

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, after the special game related to the specific jackpot symbol (in this example, “7B”), the main game symbol for a predetermined period. Will be shifted to a state where the fluctuation time (in this example, the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation) tends to be short (for example, the second limited frequency state). As a result, the fluctuation efficiency on the second main game side is increased, so that the occurrence interval of small hits (and small hit games) can be shortened, and even in the same probability fluctuation / time reduction game state, the player Therefore, it is possible to create a new gameability that there is a state advantageous to the player (or a state that seems to be advantageous to the player).

  In the present embodiment, the state where the second limited frequency is set is configured to end with 70 fluctuations, but is not limited to this, and is configured to continue until the next big hit is won. Also good.

  Although not specifically shown in the present example, the production mode (the type of production system such as background production and notice production) may be made different depending on the set limited frequency type. As such a configuration, for example, when the second limited frequency is set (after the special game that will shift to the second limited frequency), the effect mode is effect mode A (for example, a night background image is displayed). When the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency is set (after the special game that will shift to the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency), the production mode is the production mode B (for example, evening The background image is displayed). In addition, in such a configuration, an effect (a night background image) that shifts from the effect mode A to the effect mode B during the symbol change in a part of the symbol change that is expected to be a big hit when the effect mode A stays. To the evening background image). Furthermore, in such a configuration, when the symbol change that is planned to be a big hit at the time of staying in the production mode A, and after the special game related to the big hit, it is scheduled to shift to the second limited frequency again, You may comprise so that possibility that the stay of presentation mode A may be maintained becomes high. In other words, in the case where an effect that shifts from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is executed, the configuration is changed to the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency after the special game related to the symbol variation is finished. Since the possibility of transition is increased, and this may be disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game depending on whether or not such effects are performed. That is, when such a transition to the production mode B is not performed for the transition from the production mode B to the production mode A, when the production mode B stays {(* without the mode transition, from the beginning (after the end of the last special game) To) If you are in the production mode B}, if the big hit occurs, the second limitation is relatively more than the case where the big win occurs in the production mode B with mode transition. The degree of expectation to shift to the frequency will increase, and when configured in this way, the transition to the production mode B is suggested during the stay in the production mode A as the production that makes a transition from the production mode A to the production mode B. Such an effect may be executed, and then a specific reach effect may be executed, or an effect similar to the specific reach effect may be generated when the effect mode B stays.

  Although not specifically shown in this example, even if any limited frequency type is set, the total number of game balls that enter the big winning opening C10 at the time of the small hit game is displayed or entered The count display may be configured to be displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, the total number of winning prize balls (small hits, during the period in which the second limited frequency is set (especially during the period in which the second limited frequency → the special game → the second limited frequency →... Loops)). The total number of winning balls such as big hits may be displayed on the effect display device SG. Moreover, when comprised in that way, when the 2nd limited frequency state is complete | finished (or when it transfers to the production mode B from the production mode A), the total number of acquired winning balls displayed on the production display device SG Is temporarily stored, and at the timing when the effect mode in the next second limited frequency state shifts from effect mode A to effect mode B, the total number of winning balls displayed at the timing and the temporary storage are stored. You may comprise so that the sum with the total number of prize-winning balls may be displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, the total number of award winning balls displayed on the effect display device SG in the second limited frequency state is displayed in addition to the number of award winning balls based on the small hits, while the 0th limited frequency state and the first In the limited frequency state, it is desirable not to display the number of winning balls due to small hits (in order to make it appear that the appearance speed is improved by the number of winning balls based on small hits in the second limited frequency state) The purpose of differentiating).

  Although not specifically shown in this example, the game state that shifts after the end of the special game related to the same jackpot symbol depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot that triggered the special game (especially the time-saving game state / limited frequency) State) and its duration may be different. For example, in this example, after the end of the time-saving game, when the remaining second main game side holds the big hit relating to the “7B” symbol, the second limited frequency is set after the special game relating to the big hit is over. You may comprise so that it may not set (for example, 1st limited frequency is set).

  Further, in this example, only the end of the special game related to one type of jackpot symbol is used as an opportunity to shift to a state advantageous to the player (in this example, the second limited frequency state), but this is not limitative. Instead, for example, a plurality of jackpot symbols that shift to a state advantageous to the player after the special game ends may be provided. Also, in that case, the period in which the player is in an advantageous state differs depending on which jackpot symbol is hit (for example, 70 fluctuations after big hit A, 150 fluctuations after big hit B, It may be configured to be in an advantageous state. In addition, when a plurality of small hit symbols and losing symbols are provided and a specific small hit symbol or losing symbol is selected, it is possible to shift to a state advantageous to the player (meaning the second limited frequency in the present embodiment). It may be configured. In this case, as described above, the game state that shifts after the small hit game related to the same small hit symbol and the duration thereof may differ depending on the game state at the time of the small hit.

  In this example, when one of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other symbol is forcibly stopped by a lost symbol. At this time, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c are configured to be subtracted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timing of the variation time of the other symbol is temporarily stopped, May be configured so that the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c are not subtracted.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, after the first main game side wins a big hit with the “5A” symbol, in the second limited frequency state, when there is no limited frequency (the loss fluctuation is 10 to 60 seconds, the small hit fluctuation Is 75 to 95 seconds), the variation time on the second main game side is shortened (the loss variation is 0.5 seconds and the small hit variation is 1 second). Although an example that can create a pseudo bonus of winning a winning ball by winning a game has been described, there are other specs of gaming machines that can be realized by a similar board configuration. For example, if the first main game side does not win a big hit with the “5A” symbol (for example, if it is a big hit with the “7A” symbol), a limited frequency state different from the second limited frequency (for example, lose By configuring so that the fluctuation is shifted to 3 seconds and the small hit fluctuation is 1 to 10 seconds), the chance zone for shifting to the second limited frequency state which is a high profit state (the above-mentioned second limited frequency is It is possible to create gaming machines having different limited frequency states.

  Also, limited frequency A, limited frequency B, limited frequency C, limited frequency D (fluctuation efficiency on the second main game side: A> B> C> D) are provided, and a small hit for a big hit or a specific small hit symbol is provided. As a trigger, the limited frequency type may be switched. In such a configuration, as the big hit (or a specific small hit) is continued within the ST number, the variation frequency on the second main game side is higher (= the player's profit is higher) to the limited frequency type. By configuring so as to switch (that is, there is no change efficiency rank down), it is possible to create a new gameability that increases the profitability of the player each time a consecutive home (in that case, the upper limit of the number of STs) The set limited frequency type is reset).

  Further, in this example, the variation efficiency on the second main game side is improved by shifting to a limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time on the second main game side is short is easily selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, since the gaming machine according to the present example is a parallel lottery type gaming machine, it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state in which a variation mode in which the variation time on the first main game side is long is easily selected. You may comprise so that the relative variation efficiency (the number of times of execution of the 2nd main game change with respect to the 1st main game change) on the 2nd main game side between the 1st main game and the 2nd main game may be improved.

(Fifth embodiment)
Here, the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine having a gaming property that can enjoy both the acquisition of a prize ball by a special game and the acquisition of a prize ball by a small hit game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration specialized for winning a winning ball. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in 5th Embodiment, it is about the position and shape of 2nd main game start opening B10. In the fifth embodiment, the second main game start port B10 is provided directly below the first main game start port A10, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is connected to the first main game start port A10. It is configured to be able to enter any of the second main game start opening B10. In addition, the second main game start opening B10 has a horizontally long shape, and a game ball can always enter, and the game ball can easily enter compared to the first main game start opening A10 (in this example, The game ball is easy to enter due to the large opening into which the game ball enters (the number of prize balls for entering the second main game start opening B10 is 1).

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 6 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). With this configuration, the second main game side can start to change even when the first main game side changes, and the first main game side also changes when the second main game side changes. Can start (so-called parallel lottery).

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 82 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) variation start condition is satisfied. The change start condition is not during a special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not changing the first main game symbol (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not changing). ), And there is a reservation for the main game symbol and it is not in the small hit game. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, when the process related to the first main game symbol is executed, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol fluctuates, but the first main game symbol is fluctuating. If there is, the variation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

  Next, in step 1407-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the main game side random number. Next, in Step 1407-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the read main game side random number from the hold information and shifts (holds up) the remaining hold information. Next, in step 1407-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol winning lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the result of lottery determination, and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number). The main game symbol variation mode is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the information related to the determined main game symbol and the command related to the game state information (a command to the sub side, such as a symbol variation display start instruction command). To do. Next, in step 1407-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines a predetermined time related to the change time of the main game symbol based on the change mode as a first main game timer MP11t-C1 (second main game timer MP11t- Set to C2) to start the timer. Next, in step 1407-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the display unit B21g), the variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, if No in Step 1407-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) changing flag is turned on in Step 1407-11. If YES in step 1407-11, the flow advances to step 1407-12.

  Next, in step 1407-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display part A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The change display of the main game symbol on the (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped, the display control is performed as the fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to Step 1407-16. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-12, in step 1407-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1407-14, in step 1407-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display part A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The change display of the main game symbol on the (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped with the stop symbol as a losing symbol, the display of the losing symbol is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to Step 1407-16. .

  Next, in step 1407-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information to the sub-main control unit SM side that the symbol change is terminated (symbol confirmation display instruction command). Is set (sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-18. Next, in step 1407-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-18, in step 1407-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-18, in step 1407-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-20, in step 1407-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1407-20, the process proceeds to step 1500 (fourth).

  Next, in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described above. Next, in step 3350 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency end determination process described above, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 84 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the fifth embodiment. First, as shown in the section (a) in the figure, in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time-reduced gaming state, the number of game balls fired and the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 Due to the difference from the winning ball due to the entry, the player's ball will gradually decrease.

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 5B, in the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, the big winning opening C10 is short-opened (short-time opening in which it is difficult to enter the game ball). Therefore, it is difficult to acquire a prize ball, and the number of balls held by the player does not change (or is small). Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A” is completed, the game state is changed to a probability variation / time reduction game, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section (c) in the figure, in the probability variation / time shortening gaming state (second limited frequency), a small hit occurs with a probability of 1004/1024 (= almost every variation), As a result of paying out a winning ball by entering the big winning opening C10 related to the small hit, the player's holding ball increases. Note that the probability variation / time-reduced gaming state (second limited frequency) in (c) is a ST (probability variation gaming state with a limited number of times) up to 200 variations, and is a gaming state that is highly profitable for the player. is there.

  Next, as shown in the section (d) in the figure, in the special game related to the big hit symbol “5B”, the big winning opening C10 is short-opened (short-time opening in which it is difficult to enter the game ball). Therefore, it is difficult to acquire a prize ball, and the number of balls held by the player does not change (or is small). Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5B” is completed, the game state is changed to a probability variation / time reduction game, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type. In addition, since the upper limit number of the probability variation gaming state is reset, the high profit state up to 200 variations is started again.

  Next, since the section of FIG. 5E is the same as the gameability of FIG. Note that the jackpot symbol on the second main game side has only “5B” for resetting the upper limit count of the probability variation gaming state, so the upper limit count of the probability variation count (200 variations in this example) is reached (or When the first main game side wins the “7A” symbol), the probability variation / time shortening gaming state ends.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a timing chart according to the gaming state transition in the fifth embodiment. In the upper part of the figure, a case where a big hit is made with the “5A” symbol in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time shortening gaming state will be described as an example. In the game before 1 in the figure, the variation time on the second main game side tends to be long, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the 2R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol “5A”. In this example, in the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, the special winning opening C10 is short-opened, so that it is difficult to obtain a winning ball by entering the special winning opening C10.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, triggered by the end of the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A”, a transition is made to a probability variation gaming state with a limited number of times up to 200 variations (so-called ST), and A second limited frequency is set.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol “BK”, and the small hit game is executed (in the small hit game, the probability variation is changed). Switching between gaming state and time saving gaming state is not performed). During the second limited frequency (3 to 4 and 5 to 6 in the figure), the variation time of the second main game symbol is likely to be short, and the second main game side has a high probability of making a small hit, Small hit games will occur continuously.

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the 2R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol “5B”. In this example, in the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, the special winning opening C10 is short-opened, so that it is difficult to obtain a winning ball by entering the special winning opening C10. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to non-probability change (non-probability change game state).

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, triggered by the end of the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5B”, a transition is made again to a probability variation gaming state (so-called ST) of up to 200 variations, A second limited frequency is set.

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the probability varying gaming state and the second limited frequency state will be terminated when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 200 times within the period of 5-6 in the figure. . It should be noted that the games after 6 in the figure, like the games before 1 in the figure, tend to have a long fluctuation time on the second main game side, and the games on the first main game side are mainly executed. Become.

  Next, with reference to the lower part of the figure, a case where a big hit with the “7A” symbol in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time shortened gaming state will be described as an example. First, at the timing shown in FIG. 8A, the 8R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol “7A”.

  Next, at the timing of b in the figure, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7A” is completed, the state shifts to a probability variation game state with a limited number of times up to 200 variations (so-called ST). However, since it does not shift to the second limited frequency state, the fluctuation on the second main game side tends to be long after that, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

  By changing as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment can always enter the first main game start opening A10 and can always enter the ball (entering more than the first main game start opening A10) Easy) second main game starting port B10, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be changed simultaneously. Further, when it is not in the second limited frequency state, the variation time on the second main game side tends to be long, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed. Further, the second main game is configured to have a small hit with a high probability (in this example, a probability of 1004/1024). Here, when a big hit is made with a specific jackpot symbol (in this example, “5A” and “5B”), a special game related to the jackpot (in this example, a special game that short-opens the big winning opening C10). After the end of the game, it is difficult to enter the game ball), and the transition to the second limited frequency state (and the probability variation game state) where the variation time on the second main game side tends to be short is possible. By configuring as described above, the second limited frequency state is ended thereafter (in this example, the main game symbol is displayed 200 times continuously and stopped with a symbol other than the big hit, or the big hit with the “7A” symbol. A new game is created in which small hits are continuously generated until the game is completed, and winning balls are obtained by entering the winning balls A10 released by the small hits. Can do it. In addition, since it is always easy to enter the second main game start port B10, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d (so-called electric Chu) that supports entering the second main game start port B10 is provided. There is no need to provide it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of members and development costs.

  In this example, when one of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other symbol is forcibly stopped by a lost symbol. At this time, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c are subtracted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the measurement of the variation time of the other symbol is temporarily stopped, May be configured not to subtract the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, after a big hit with the “5A” symbol on the first main game side, in the second limited frequency state, when there is no limited frequency (loss fluctuation is 10 to 60 seconds, small hit fluctuation Is 75 to 95 seconds), the variation time on the second main game side is shortened (the loss variation is 0.5 seconds and the small hit variation is 1 second). Although an example that can create a pseudo bonus of winning a winning ball by winning a game has been described, there are other specs of gaming machines that can be realized by a similar board configuration. For example, if the first main game side does not win a big hit with the “5A” symbol (for example, if it is a big hit with the “7A” symbol), a limited frequency state different from the second limited frequency (for example, lose By configuring so that the fluctuation is shifted to 3 seconds and the small hit fluctuation is 1 to 10 seconds), the chance zone for shifting to the second limited frequency state which is a high profit state (the above-mentioned second limited frequency is It is possible to create gaming machines having different limited frequency states.

  Also, limited frequency A, limited frequency B, limited frequency C, limited frequency D (fluctuation efficiency on the second main game side: A> B> C> D) are provided, and a small hit for a big hit or a specific small hit symbol is provided. As a trigger, the limited frequency type may be switched. In such a configuration, as the big hit (or a specific small hit) is continued within the ST number, the variation frequency on the second main game side is higher (= the player's profit is higher) to the limited frequency type. By configuring so as to switch (that is, there is no change efficiency rank down), it is possible to create a new gameability that increases the profitability of the player each time a consecutive home (in that case, the upper limit of the number of STs) The set limited frequency type is reset).

  Further, in this example, the variation efficiency on the second main game side is improved by shifting to a limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time on the second main game side is short is easily selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, since the gaming machine according to the present example is a parallel lottery type gaming machine, it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state in which a variation mode in which the variation time on the first main game side is long is easily selected. You may comprise so that the relative variation efficiency (the number of times of execution of the 2nd main game change with respect to the 1st main game change) on the 2nd main game side between the 1st main game and the 2nd main game may be improved.

(Sixth embodiment)
The configuration as described in the above embodiment is a gameability that allows a player to win a game by continuously generating small hit games. However, using such a concept, the gameplay is different from the above-described gameplay. Can create more playability. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the sixth embodiment is also a modification based on the fifth embodiment, it is supplemented that any configuration shown in the fifth embodiment can be applied in the sixth embodiment. .

  Next, FIG. 86 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the sixth embodiment, in the second big prize opening C20, the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a small hit symbol (the types of symbols will be described later). The winning opening corresponding to the main game is located in the upper right position of the out opening D36 and the upper right position of the first major winning opening C10. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C24). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Variable (exciting and changing the second big prize opening solenoid C24). In the sixth embodiment, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d is a flat member like the first big prize opening electric combination C11d, but the first big prize opening electric combination C11d is variable. Unlike the embodiment, an embodiment is adopted in which the game board (game area D30) is variable in the vertical direction. In other words, the second grand prize opening electrical accessory C21d is substantially completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a retracted state) and transparent from the game board (game area D30). A state of projecting toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) is taken until the board D16 comes close. Then, the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d protrudes from the game board (the game area D30), thereby allowing the box-like member C20-1 (to this box-like member) to receive the game balls flowing down the game area D30. When the game ball that has entered enters the second grand prize opening C20), that is, when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20- In the case where the game ball can enter 1 (and thus in the second grand prize opening C20), while the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d takes the advanced state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended In this case, the game ball cannot enter into the second grand prize opening C20 (this box-shaped member is substantially sealed).

  The first special winning opening C10 is provided with the specific area C22 described above in the sixth embodiment, and the first grand winning opening C10 is opened in the distribution game execution round in the special game. During the normal round in the special game (rounds other than the distribution game execution round in the special game) and the small hit game, the second big prize opening C20 is opened.

  Regarding the game contents developed on the game board, first, a game ball launched toward the game area D30 is a flow down route (hereinafter, left-handed) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area). 2) or a flow down route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-handed route) formed on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). Be divided. Here, the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route can have an opportunity to enter the left first main game start opening A10-1 or the first major winning port C10, while the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route. Can get a chance to enter the auxiliary game start opening H10, the second grand prize winning opening C20, the right first main game starting opening A10-2, the second main game starting opening B10, and the first big winning prize opening C10. Further, in the sixth embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to enter the first big prize opening C10 more easily than the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route ("Entered Ball"). “Easy to play” and “difficult to enter” are determined based on the number of entered balls when, for example, 10000 game balls are fired on the right-handed route and the left-handed route, respectively.

  On the left-hand route (not shown), the game ball is guided or not guided toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. However, the number of game nails and windmills is smaller on the right-handed route (although not shown) than the left-handed route, and the game ball has a substantially uniform flow-down manner. take.

  More specifically, with respect to the right-handed route, first, a game ball launched aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the launching intensity of the game ball by the launching device is maximum, also called right-handed) is Falling by its own weight by flying inside the game area D30 along the outer rail D32 and colliding with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 Begin. Next, the fallen game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 immediately below it with a high probability, and then the flow path width exceeds one game ball and less than two game balls. The ball is collected to D50 (the ball is collected regardless of whether or not it has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10). Next, the game balls flowing down along the rectifying passage D50 are discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, and then slightly inclined to the left in the horizontal direction. After rolling on each of the first, second stage passage D51-2 and third stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the outlet D36.

  Here, the first stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3 are formed. The game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed in advance by being fixed to the game board. That is, when the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first big prize opening electric combination C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 The game ball released from the ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1 → the game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → the second The game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third stage passage D51-3 → the game ball released from the third stage passage D51-3 is released toward the outlet D36. , And are configured to take a substantially uniform flow-down mode.

  In this way, since the game balls that have flowed down the right-handed route take a substantially uniform flow-down mode, if the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at an interval of about 0.6 seconds) When the player enters the game start opening H10 stably and the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d is in the open state (retracted state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and the second big prize opening) When the ball enters stably in (C20) and the first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d is in an open state, the ball can be stably entered into the first big prize opening C10. Note that the first main game start port electric role that can take the retracted state and the advanced state in the space until the game ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3. When the object A11-2d is provided and the first main game start opening electric accessory A11-2d enters the advanced state, the game ball can be guided toward the right first main game start opening A10-2 It is configured.

  In the case of such a configuration, the game ball released from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second big prize opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, there is a risk that the second grand prize winning electrical accessory C21d will be damaged. Therefore, at least at the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, a configuration for scraping the momentum of the game ball flowing down (substantially dropping) in the rectifying passage D50 is essential. In the sixth embodiment, as shown in the vicinity of the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the wall surface of the rectifying passage D50 protrudes into the rectifying passage D50. It is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball by dropping the ball into the zigzag. In addition, in 6th Embodiment, although it is the same reasoning, the structure for scraping the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the 1st step path D51-1 is also provided. The point will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 82 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the fifth embodiment is step 1410-3 (sixth), the purpose of which is to adjust the big win winning probability and the small win winning probability at the time of executing the parallel lottery, as will be described later, When staying in a certain gaming state, the selection tendency (in other words, the lottery table used when lottering the varying time) for the variation time of the main game symbol is made uniform (staying in a certain gaming state) If it is, the lottery table is not changed). That is, after determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol at step 1410-2, at step 1410-3 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol determination result lottery and the first main game content determination. Step 1407-determines the variation mode of the first (second) main game symbol based on the random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly the variation mode lottery random number), and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. 7 The limited frequency end determination process {step 3350 (fourth)}, which is a process related to the limited frequency in the fifth embodiment, is deleted.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display process in the sixth embodiment. First, as a feature of the main game table 1 (a table for winning / failing lottery), the first main game side and the second main game side are both provided with a small hit, and the result of the winning / failing lottery becomes a big hit. The probability is 5/1024 for non-stochastic variation games and 7/1024 for probability variation games. In addition, the probability that the result of the winning lottery on the first main game side is a small win is 17/1024, and the probability that the result of the winning lottery on the second main game side is a small hit is 1016/1024. In addition, the probability of losing as a result of the winning decision on the first main game side is 1002/1024 in the non-stochastic variable game, and 1000/1024 in the probability varying game, and the winning lottery on the second main game side The probability of losing the result is 3/1024 for non-probability variation games and 1/1024 for probability variation games. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery result on the second main game side is configured to be almost a small hit. On the first main game side, in both the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, as a result of the success / failure lottery, the ratio selected is “losing ≧ small hit ≧ big winning”. On the other hand, on the second main game side, the ratio selected as a result of the lottery determination for both the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the probability variation gaming state is “small hit ≧ big hit ≧ losing”. It should be noted that the first main game side only needs to be able to select the loss most easily, and may assign a random number such that “losing ≧ big hit ≧ small hit” (particularly, even if there is no provision for the small hit) Good). On the second main game side, it is only necessary that the small hit is most easily selected, and the random numbers may be distributed so that “small hit ≧ losing ≧ big hit”.

  Next, as a feature of the main game table 2 (symbol determination table), the first main game side is provided with a big hit symbol (4A in this example) in which the second big winning opening C20 is short open. On the other hand, the second main game side is configured not to be provided with a big hit symbol in which the second big prize opening C20 is short open. The jackpot symbol with the largest total number of winning balls in a single jackpot is “7A / 7B” in which a special game of 16R is executed, and a maximum of “2400 balls” is paid out (details) Will be described later).

  Next, as a feature of the main game table 3 (variation mode determination table), in the second main game side, in the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state (latency probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state) Regardless of the result of success or failure, only the shortest variation time (1 second in this example) is selected. With this configuration, in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the latent probability varying state with a so-called non-electric support state), if the right hand is executed, the small hits are continuously repeated at short intervals. It is configured to continue winning (the effects created by this configuration will be described later). In game states (particularly, non-stochastic variation game states) other than the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state (the so-called latent probability variation state with a non-electric support state), a relatively short-term fluctuation occurs at the time of big hit. Only the time (5 seconds in this example) is selected, and only a relatively long fluctuation time (100 minutes or more in this example) is selected at the time of loss or small hit. It has become. In addition, in the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state), the average variation time at the time of big hit of the second main game symbol and the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state) The average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit time is “average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit time in the normal game state> the average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the normal game state when the big hit time The relationship is “time”. In addition, the average variation time other than the big hit of the second main game symbol in the normal gaming state (non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), and the probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (so-called non-electric support state) The average change time of the second main game symbol in the latent probability change state with the following is: “the average change time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit in the normal game state> the probability change game state and the non-time shortened game state The relationship is “average fluctuation time of 2 main game symbols”. In addition, after the timing when the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the so-called latent probability variation state with the non-electric support state) are finished, the variation time of the second main game symbol becomes extremely long, At the timing, there is a high possibility that the second main game hold remains, and there is a concern that the progress of the game may be hindered when the game is advanced by left-handed after the timing. Therefore, in order to forcibly stop the remaining suspension by losing (in order to digest the remaining suspension as losing), the small hit on the first main game side appears at an appropriate frequency (in this example, 17/1024) (In this case, the variation time is 3 seconds). Specifically, during the change of the second main game symbol (especially during the symbol change related to the small hit symbol), the symbol change related to the small hit symbol on the first main game side ends, and the first main game side When the small hit game is started, the change of the second main game symbol is terminated by the forced stop of the change of the second main game symbol, and the second main game is terminated. It is possible to prevent the side small hit game from being executed. In the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the change of the first main game symbol that is fluctuating is forcibly stopped by the loss symbol by the start of the small hit game on the second main game side, In the fourth embodiment, a probability variation gaming state and a non-determination due to a variation of the main game symbol for a predetermined number of times (in this example, 200 times) in the jackpot or probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state on the second main game side Since the game is such that the time-reduced gaming state can be ended, all the stop symbols related to the fluctuations on the first main game side in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state are configured to be lost. . As described above, the difference in the average value of the variation time that may vary depending on the gaming state is configured such that the difference in the variation time on the second main game side is larger than the difference on the variation time on the first main game side. .

  In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the other main game side is changing the symbol at the timing when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped, the symbol change on the other main game side is compulsory by the lost symbol. Although it is configured to stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation of the other main game symbol is started during the variation related to a certain big hit symbol or small hit symbol, The result of lottery determination of the other main game symbol may be forcibly converted to lose, and the variation of the other main game symbol may be stopped at a variation stop timing related to a certain big hit symbol or small hit symbol.

  It should be noted that there is no problem even if the configuration of the main game table 3 (variation mode determination table) in the sixth embodiment is changed, for example, (1) a game state that is not a non-time-reduced gaming state and a probability varying gaming state. On the first main game side, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game can enter the limited frequency state. (2) When the game state is not the non-time-reduced gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, When there are many types of variation modes related to the side (for example, 100 types), and (3) a gaming state that is not a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state, the average value of the variation time pertaining to the first main gaming side is (4) Probability variation gaming state and non-time, which is a medium time (shorter than the long time on the second main game side and longer than the short time on the second main game side, for example, 30 seconds) Games that are not in a shortened gaming state In the state, the second main game side does not shift to the limited frequency state (the first main game side does not shift even if the first main game side is in the limited frequency state), (5) in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state If there is no gaming state, there are few types of variation modes on the second main gaming symbol side (for example, one type), (6) if the gaming state is not a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state, (2) When the average value of the variation time on the main game symbol side is a long time (for example, 100 minutes), (7) in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, the first main game side is limited (8) In the case of the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, there are few types of variation modes related to the first main game symbol side (not the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state) In a gaming state The number of variations is greater than the number of types of variation related to the second main game symbol side, for example, five types), (9) in the case of the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state, the first main game symbol side When the average value of the variation time is short (for example, 3 seconds), (10) in the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the second main game side does not shift to the limited frequency state. (11) In the case of the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, there are few types of variation modes related to the second main game symbol side (in the case of the gaming state that is not the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state) The number of variation modes on the second main game symbol side is larger than, for example, five types), (12) in the case of the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state, the second main game symbol side The average value of the fluctuation time is short (for example, 3 seconds) {all the configurations (1) to (12) may be satisfied at the same time or may be combined as appropriate}. Moreover, you may comprise so that all the structures of said (1)-(12) may be applied only at the time of a loss. Further, in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the first main game side may be configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and is configured as such. Thus, when the right-handed strike is executed in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, it is possible to execute either the first main gaming starting port or the second main gaming starting port. In the case of a configuration that can enter the ball, if the transition to the limited frequency state is made, by increasing the variation time of the first main game symbol, until the first main game side wins a big hit The average time can be increased, that is, the time during which the small hits on the second main game side are continued can be increased. In addition, the predetermined condition that is the condition for shifting to the limited frequency state described above is, for example, that a specific symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol is stopped, and the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit or small hit is a predetermined number of times. Reach, etc. Note that the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol according to the predetermined condition may be all the big hit symbols and / or all the small hit symbols, or may be a specific big hit symbol and / or a specific small hit symbol.

  Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 36 in the sixth embodiment. In the figure, differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail. Differences from the second embodiment are steps 1854 (sixth) to 1858 (sixth), step 1864 (sixth), steps 1888 (sixth), and 1890 (sixth). When the distribution game execution flag is off (that is, at the start of the round), in step 1854 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates that the stopped main game symbol is the long open symbol (first It is determined whether or not one big winning opening C10 is a big hit symbol that is long open, and in this example, it is 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1854 (sixth), in step 1856 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the long open pattern of the first big winning opening C10 having the specific area C22 (for example, 30 seconds). To make it easy to win the specific area C22), the process proceeds to step 1860. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1854 (sixth), in step 1858 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the short opening pattern of the first big winning opening C10 having the specific area C22 (for example, The game is opened for 0.01 seconds, making it difficult to win the specific area C22), and the process proceeds to step 1860.

  In addition, after the distribution game execution flag is turned on in step 1862, in step 1864 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first big prize opening C10 in the set release pattern. Move to 1888 (sixth). Note that if the distribution game execution flag is ON in step 1852, the process also proceeds to step 1888 (sixth). Next, in step 1888 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) has been won in the first big prize opening C10. In the case of Yes in step 1888 (sixth), in step 1890 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first big prize opening C10, and proceeds to step 1872. In the case of No in step 1888 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1868, and in the case of Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1890 (sixth). Further, in the second embodiment, the big prize opening opened in the distribution game execution round is the second big prize opening C20, but in the sixth embodiment, the big prize opening opened in the distribution game execution round. The mouth is the first grand prize opening C10.

  Here, the chart at the top of the figure shows the average number of winning balls for each jackpot in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the chart, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot symbol with the largest total number of winning balls in one jackpot is “7A / 7B”, and “15 balls × 10 balls × 16R” is the maximum. “2400 balls” are paid out (the details created by this configuration will be described later). In the sixth embodiment, the distribution game execution round is “3R, 5R” in all jackpot symbols.

  Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (sixth) in FIG. 17 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1680-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value (200 times in this example) to the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c in step 1680-2. Next, in step 1680-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1680-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1680-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol related to the finished special game is a probabilistic / time-short hit symbol (7A, 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1680-5, in step 1680-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value A (200 times in this example) to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and in step 1680-9. Migrate to

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680-1, in step 1680-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol related to the finished special game is a time and big hit symbol (in this example, 4A). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1680-7, in step 1680-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number B (50 times in this example) to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and in step 1680-9. Migrate to

  Next, in step 1680-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}. Even in the case of No in step 1680-5 or step 1680-7, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1700 (third) process}.

  Thus, in the sixth embodiment, when a transition is made to the probability variation gaming state, a predetermined number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game related to the transition (stop of the jackpot symbol related to the special game) Thus, the probability variation gaming state is ended (transition to the normal gaming state) (so-called ST). In addition, a gaming machine that shifts to a probability-changing gaming state after the end of a special game due to a game ball entering a specific area C22 provided in the first grand prize opening C10 (a so-called ball-accurate game) Machine). Also, after the special game ends when the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to “5A / 5B” (and the special game ends when the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to “4A”. In the later but basically not entering), it is configured to be in a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state (latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state) (No in Step 1799-5) Is the case where the stop symbol is “5A / 5B” or the stop symbol is “4A”). In the sixth embodiment, if there is a ball entering the specific area C22 during the special game related to the short and big hit symbol (4A) (when the main game probability change transition flag is turned on), the probability Although it is configured to shift to the variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the non-probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (Step 1799- It is preferable to set a predetermined number B of 8), and a transition to a normal gaming state (a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state) may be made.

  Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1700 (sixth) in FIG. 72 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag in step 1745-2. Next, in step 1745-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1745-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M has the current stop symbol as the first main game small hit symbol (the first main game side small hit symbol, in this example, AK). It is determined whether or not. If YES in step 1745-4, in step 1745-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set in the small hit game timer MP41t during the first release time (when the small hit game related to the first main game is executed). Time, in this example, 0.01 second) is set, and the flow proceeds to step 1745-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1745-4, in other words, if the current stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (the second main game side small hit symbol, in this example, BK), step In 1745-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second opening time (the time set when executing the small hit game related to the second main game to the small hit game timer MP41t. 7 seconds). Next, in step 1745-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit start command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hit game has started (sub control command transmission processing in step 1999). The process proceeds to step 1745-8. Thus, in the sixth embodiment, the small hitting start command is configured to be set only when the small hitting game related to the second main game side small hitting symbol (BK in this example) is executed, It is not set when the small hit game related to the small hit symbol on the main game side (AK in this example) is executed. Therefore, when the small winning symbol on the first main game side (AK in this example) is stopped, even if the player visually recognizes the effect, it is difficult to detect the small winning combination, and it is difficult to acquire the game ball by the small winning. (Because right-handed is not executed). It should be noted that the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is a long-term variation (100 in the second main game symbol in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time shortened game state)). (For example, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the latent probability variation state with the so-called non-electric support state) triggered by the cumulative number of fluctuations of the main game symbol) When the game state is shifted from the normal game state (non-stochastic variable game state and non-time-reduced game state), it plays a role of forcibly stopping the remaining symbol variation related to the hold on the second main game side}. In addition, when the small hit game related to the first main game side small hit symbol (AK in this example) is executed, and the small hit game related to the second main game side small hit symbol (BK in this example) In any case, a small hit start command may be set. In such a case, a small hit symbol related to the first main game side (AK in this example) is set. It is desirable that the small hitting start command set at the time of executing the hit game is different from the small hitting start command set at the time of executing the small hit game related to the second main game side small hit symbol (BK in this example). For example, at the time of executing the small hit game related to the first main game side small hit symbol (AK in this example), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize on the effect display device SG (for example, the display area is small) Display the strike instruction display (may be without sound) When a small hit game related to the second main game side small hit symbol (in this example, BK) is executed, a right-handed instruction display that is easy for the player to visually recognize (for example, has a large display area) on the effect display device SG May be displayed (may be notified by voice).

  Next, in step 1745-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening C20, starts the small hit game timer MP41t, and proceeds to step 1747-1. If NO in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1745-9 whether the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1745-9, the process proceeds to step 1747-1.

  Next, in step 1747-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls have been won in the second grand prize opening C20. If YES in step 1747-1, the process proceeds to step 1747-3. If NO, in step 1747-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the predetermined time by the small hit gaming timer MP41t ( Whether or not the opening time has elapsed). If YES in step 1747-2, the flow advances to step 1747-3. Next, in step 1747-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (the second main game side small hit symbol, in this example, BK). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1747-3, in step 1747-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit end command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hit game has ended (control in step 1999). The command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by command transmission processing), and the process proceeds to Step 1747-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1747-3, in other words, even when the stop symbol is the first main game small hit symbol (the first main game side small hit symbol, in this example, AK) The process proceeds to 1747-5 (similar to the small hit start command described above, the small hit end command is also set only during the small hit game related to the second main game small hit symbol). In the sixth embodiment, the big prize opening that is opened by the small hit game is the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1747-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1747-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the small hit gaming timer MP41t and resets (zero clear) it. Next, in step 1747-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997). In addition, also when it is No in step 1745-9 or step 1747-2, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1997).

  Here, the chart in the upper part of the figure shows the average number of winning balls for each small hit symbol in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the chart, in the sixth embodiment, the average total number of winning balls per one small hit (that is, the expected number of game balls that a player can acquire by one small hit) is “ In the case of “AK”, the number is relatively small as “1.5 balls”, while in the case of “BK”, the number is relatively large as “15 balls”, that is, the small number related to “AK”. In many cases, no game balls are placed in the second big prize opening C20 in many cases, while in the small hits related to “BK”, in many cases, the second big prize opening is used. It is configured such that one or more game balls enter C20.

  Next, FIG. 92 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the sixth embodiment. First, as shown in the section of FIG. 5A, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state), the number of game balls fired and the left first main game start opening A10-1 The player's ball will gradually decrease due to the difference from the prize ball due to entering the ball.

  Next, as shown in the section (b) of the figure, during the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, a right-handed game is played, and a prize ball by entering the first big prize opening C10 is a prize ball. By paying out, the player's ball will increase. Thereafter, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “5A” is completed, the game state changes to a probability-variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state (a latent probability changing state with a so-called non-electric support state). If the second main game symbol is in a variable display at the time of the stop display of the big hit symbol “5A” (the so-called parallel lottery is adopted, such an event may occur). Even if the second main game symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol, the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped with a lost symbol.

  Next, as shown in the section (c) in the figure, in the winning lottery on the second main game side in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the latent probability varying state with the so-called non-electric support state) 1016/1024 (= almost every variation) with a probability of winning a small hit, and in the latent probability variation state, the symbol variation related to the small hit is short (1 second in this example), As a result of paying out a winning ball for entering the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit, the player's holding ball increases. Note that the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state) of (c) are STs (probability variation game state with a limited number of times) up to 200 variations. In addition, in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (c) (latency probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state), the probability of being a big hit is 7/1024 per variation, so an average of 146 variations continues. In addition, because of the 146 symbol fluctuations, the small hit is averaged 145 times. Therefore, during the stay in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state of (c), The average number of prize balls is 2175.

  Next, as shown in the section (d) of the figure, during a special game related to the big hit symbol “7B”, a prize ball is paid out by entering the second big prize opening C20, etc. The player's ball will increase. Here, when the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7B” is finished, the game state becomes a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state (probability change state with a so-called electric support state). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, “7B” is a jackpot symbol with which the most game balls can be paid out, and “2400 balls” prize balls are paid out in the jackpot related to “7B”. Become.

  Here, the section from (c) to (d) described above includes the jackpot related to the “7B” symbol in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the latent probability varying state with the so-called non-electric support state). A series of flows in which a game ball can be acquired. Of the series of flows, a section (c), that is, a section in which a winning ball is obtained by a small hit (or a section in which a winning ball excluding a big hit is acquired). The total average number of winning balls in () is “2145 balls”, on the other hand, the section (d), that is, the big hit (the first main game side big hit and the second main game side) that has the largest number of winning balls. The total average number of winning balls in the section that wins the winning ball according to the jackpot and the biggest winning jackpot of all jackpots is “2400 balls”. The total number of winning balls by small hits is configured. Further, the total number of winning balls by jackpot> the total number of winning balls excluding jackpot is also configured.

  Next, as shown in the section (e) of the figure, in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (probability variation state with the so-called electric support state), the player plays a right-handed game, The game ball is fired toward the 1 main game start opening A10-2, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed. Further, the game can proceed while maintaining the possession ball by the winning ball by entering the game ball into the right first main game start opening A10-2.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state (the latent probability varying state with the so-called non-electric support state) The variation time relating to the two main game symbols is set to a relatively short time (1 second in this example), and the game is advanced by firing a game ball toward the second main game start opening B10 by right-handed. On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (probability variation state with the so-called electric support state), the variation time related to the second main game symbol is relatively long (in this example, 100). For a long time equal to or longer than minutes), and a right-handed game ball is fired toward the right first main game start port A10-2 to advance the game. Also, in the case of a probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state (a latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state), winning continuously for the small hits related to entering the second main game starting port B10. In the case of a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state (probability variation state with a so-called electric support state), while the game ball is increased, the first main game starting point is obtained. The game is expected to win big wins while maintaining the ball with the winning ball of the electric accessory A11-2d, etc. Even when the game proceeds with a right hit, a plurality of games that differ depending on the game state are realized. Will be able to.

(Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment)
In addition, in 6th Embodiment, although the structure which can increase a holding ball by winning continuously in small hits was explained in full detail, such a game machine is only the structure of 6th Embodiment. It is not limited to. Therefore, a configuration in which the holding ball is increased by consecutive small hits different from the sixth embodiment is a first modification from the sixth embodiment, and only the changes from the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment can execute the parallel lottery as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, and does not have the V winning opening C27 and the specific area C22. It is said.

  First, FIG. 93 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of a gaming machine in Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  In the first modification of the sixth embodiment, two start ports, a first main game start port A10 and a first main game start port A10-2, are provided as the first main game start port. The game starting port A10 is configured such that a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is easy to enter, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 is easy to enter. Further, the first main game start port A10-2, the second main game start port B10, and the auxiliary game start port H10 are provided on the right side of the game area D30, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 enters the ball. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is configured to be difficult to enter. The second main game start port B10 is not provided with an electric accessory, and the first main game start port A10-2 can easily enter the first main game start port A10-2. The first main game start opening A11d that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state where entry is difficult (can be displaced based on the result of the auxiliary game), and the first main game start opening A10-2 It has a first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s-2 for detecting entrance. In addition, the first grand prize opening C10 and the first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d are easy to be guided by the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), and flow down the left side of the game area D30. It is configured so that the game ball to be guided is difficult to be guided.

  Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to Step 1700 (sixth) of FIG. 72 in Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment. The change from the sixth embodiment is step 3800 (sixth variation 1), that is, after the small hit execution flag is turned off in step 1747-7, the main control is performed in step 3800 (sixth variation 1). CPUMC of the board | substrate M performs the short hit related short time end determination process mentioned later, and transfers to the following process (step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hit related short time termination determination process in the first modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state and a time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3802, in step 3804, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped small winning symbol is the first main gaming small winning symbol (AK in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3804, in step 3806, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. Next, in step 3808, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). In addition, also when it is No in step 3802 or step 3804, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1997). As described above, in the first modification from the sixth embodiment, the time-saving gaming state ends when the first main game side is won in the case of the probability varying gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. That is, it is configured to shift to a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state. Similarly to the sixth embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the variation efficiency of the second main game symbol becomes extremely high (the variation time becomes short), so that the second main game The number of holding balls will increase as the game side wins frequently. The main game flow is as follows: (1) A left-handed game is executed in a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced game state, and the game progresses by entering the first main game start opening A10. 2) By winning the big hit on the first main game side, the game shifts to the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot is ended. (3) The right-handed is executed in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state. , The game proceeds by entering the first main game start opening A10-2 (the ball also enters the second main game start opening B10, but because the fluctuation efficiency is extremely bad, (4) The winning ball will not be increased.) (4) By winning the first main game small win, the game will shift from the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state to the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, The first main game start opening electric Since the object A11d is difficult to open, the ball does not enter the first main game start opening A10-2, and the variation efficiency of the second main game symbol is extremely improved, so that the second main game small hit symbol is frequently won. Will be.

  By configuring as described above, in the first modification from the sixth embodiment, the time-saving gaming state is completed by winning the first main game small hit symbol (from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state) The game state that is advantageous to the two players of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state can be continuously played. It can be a highly entertaining gaming machine that has higher expectations for winning the game.

  In addition, as a configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment, (1) the display of the decorative symbol related to the second main gaming symbol is not executed (in the case of the non-stochastic variable gaming state) (To prevent the player from making a right-hand hit), (2) The opening time of the big winning opening at the big hit and the small hit on the second main game side is made relatively short (non-stochastic game state) (In order to prevent the game ball from entering the big winning opening even if the player starts to make a right-hand hit after detecting the big win or small win on the second main game side), (3) For example, a mechanism for slowing down the flow rate when the game ball flows down, such as around the rectifying passage D50 of the sixth embodiment, may be provided.

(Modification 2 from the sixth embodiment)
In the first modification from the sixth embodiment, the small hit game related to the first main game small hit symbol is executed, so that the time-saving gaming state can be shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state. The configuration in which the time saving gaming state can be ended by a small hit is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration in which the time saving gaming state can be ended by a small hit and a configuration different from the first modification from the sixth embodiment is a second modification from the sixth embodiment. Only changes from the first modification will be described in detail.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the second modification from the sixth embodiment can execute the parallel lottery as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, and the V prize opening C27 as exemplified in the third embodiment. It is set as the structure which has.

  First, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the small hit related short time end determination process in the second modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3810, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 3810, in step 3812, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is no ball entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit. In the case of Yes in step 3812, in step 3814, the CPUMC of the main control board M measures the number of small hits that are continuously won in the time-saving gaming state. 1) is added to the counter) value. Next, in step 3816, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time-short medium / small consecutive hit counter is a time-short end value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3816, in step 3818, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag. In the second modified example from the sixth embodiment, even if the small hits that have not entered the V winning opening C27 in the time-saving gaming state continue for a predetermined number of times, the short time medium / small / medium continuous counter value increases. Therefore, it will shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state. Next, in step 3820, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to step 3824. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 3824 also in the case of No in step 3810 and step 3812. Next, in step 3824, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time-short / medium / small continuous counter to zero, and proceeds to the next processing (step 1997). In the case of No in step 3816, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the sixth embodiment, the small hit symbol that shifts to the time-reduced gaming state after the special game triggered by the small hit symbol and the non-time reduction In addition to providing a small hit symbol that shifts to the gaming state, in a time-saving gaming state, a non-time-saving gaming state is achieved by repeating a predetermined number of small hits that have not entered the V winning opening C27. When the small winning symbol that will shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state stops after the end of the special game to be transferred by entering the V winning opening C27 by being configured to be able to shift, the V winning opening While the game ball is not entered into C27, the design value is exceeded by allowing the game ball to enter the V winning opening C27 when the small winning symbol that shifts to the time-saving game state stops after the special game ends. Although it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball is acquired, the player is firing a game ball toward the second grand prize opening during a special game that is easy to win the V prize opening C27. Even if a situation where a prize cannot be won in the V winning slot C27 occurs, if the player enters the V winning slot C27 at the time of the next small hit game, the user-friendly gaming machine which does not need to shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state. It can be.

(Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment)
In the modified example 2 from the sixth embodiment to the sixth embodiment, the gaming property in the gaming machine having the small hit is exemplified, but the configuration of the gaming machine having the small hit is not limited thereto. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine having a small hit different from the configuration described above is referred to as a third modification from the sixth embodiment, and only the changes from the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 97 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. Here, the changes from the sixth embodiment are step 1700 (sixth modification 3) and step 3150 (sixth modification 3). That is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 1700 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later, and proceeds to step 1950 (third). To do. Further, after the prize ball payout control process is executed in step 1997, in step 3150 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1999.

  Next, FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 82 in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. . First, in step 1403-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change start condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1403-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the main game side random number in step 1403-2. Next, in step 1403-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the read main game side random number from the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information (holding digestion in this example). Next, in step 1403-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game symbol is determined based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number) and the game state. Run a lottery. Next, in step 1403-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). A stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined. Next, in step 1403-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol determination lottery result, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number) and the main A variation mode of the first (second) main game symbol is determined based on the stop symbol related to the game symbol. Next, in step 3650 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a variable fixed time determination process described later. Next, in step 1403-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area and the current game. A command related to the state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Do). Next, in step 1403-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1403-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the display unit B21g), according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1403-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1403-12. In the case of No in step 1403-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on in step 1403-13. In the case of Yes at step 1403-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M proceeds to step 1403-12.

  Next, in step 1403-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the change time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1403-12, in step 1403-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) that the symbol variation is completed to the sub main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1403-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the display unit B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1403-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag. Next, in step 1403-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the determined variable fixed time to the variable fixed time timer and starts. Next, in step 1403-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the variable fixing flag, and proceeds to step 1403-20. In the case of No in step 1403-13, in step 1403-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variable fixing flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 1403-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M proceeds to step 1403-20.

  Next, in step 1403-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variable fixed time timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1403-20, in step 1403-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the variable fixing flag. Next, in step 1403-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1403-22, in step 1403-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a big hit symbol stop command (command to the sub side). Next, in step 1403-24, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403-22, in step 1403-25, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1403-25, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag in step 1403-26, and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). In the case of No in 1403-25, the process proceeds to step 1500 (fourth).

  Next, in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, and proceeds to the next process (step 1550). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1403-12 and step 1403-20, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). In addition, also when it is No at step 1403-19, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 3650 (sixth modification 3) in FIG. 98 in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game short time flag is on. Next, in the case of Yes in step 3652, in step 3654, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change is a symbol change related to the second main game. In the case of Yes in step 3654, in step 3656, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the change is a symbol change related to a small hit. In the case of Yes in step 3656, in step 3658, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the fixed fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation as a long time (for example, 30 seconds), and performs the next processing (processing in step 1403-8). Migrate to If NO in step 3652, step 3654 or step 3656, in step 3660, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to be a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the next The process proceeds to the process (the process of step 1403-8). Thus, in the third modification from the sixth embodiment, the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol on the second main game side in the time-reduced gaming state is the other variable fixed time (for example, the main variable that is not the small hit symbol). Time value that is different from the fixed time variation of the game symbol, the small fixed symbol variation time of the second main game side when not in the time-reduced gaming state, the small fixed symbol variation fixed time of the first main game side, etc. It has become. In addition, with this configuration, when the second main game side win is won in the time-saving game state, the second main game hold is generated before the small hit related to the small hit symbol is started. It is configured so that the time to be secured can be secured.

  Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process in the third modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in Step 1703-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit end demonstrating flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1703-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge waiting flag is off in step 1703-2. In the case of Yes in Step 1703-2, in Step 1703-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1703-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag in Step 1703-4. Next, in step 1703-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the opening pattern of the special winning opening relating to the round. Next, in step 1703-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1703-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big prize opening and starts the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1703-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts a discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (in this example, an increment timer), and proceeds to step 1703-11. On the other hand, if No in Step 1703-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on in Step 1703-10. In the case of Yes in step 1703-10, the process proceeds to step 1703-11. Next, in Step 1703-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there has been a winning at the second big winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in Step 1703-11, in Step 1703-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) has been won in the second big prize opening C20. If Yes in step 1703-12, the process proceeds to step 1703-14. On the other hand, if step 1703-11 or step 1703-12 is No, in step 1703-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit gaming timer value has reached a predetermined time. In the case of Yes in step 1703-13, the process proceeds to step 1703-14.

  Next, in Step 1703-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, in step 1703-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge waiting flag, and proceeds to step 1703-16. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1703-2, the process proceeds to Step 1703-16.

  Next, in step 1703-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge standby timer value is the discharge standby time end value (13 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in Step 1703-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the discharge waiting timer MP41t-2 to zero in Step 1703-17. Next, in step 1703-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge waiting flag. Next, in step 1703-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1703-19, in step 1703-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds a small hit end demo timer to the small hit end demo time A (which is shorter than the small hit end demo time B described later, In this example, 3 seconds) is set and the process proceeds to Step 1703-22. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1703-19, in step 1703-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the small hit end demo timer to the small hit end demo time B (longer than the aforementioned small hit end demo time A). Yes, in this example, 5 seconds) is set and the process proceeds to Step 1703-22.

  Next, in step 1703-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit end demonstrating flag, and proceeds to step 1703-23. In addition, also when it is No in step 1703-1, it transfers to step 1703-23. Next, in step 1703-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit end demo timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1703-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit end demonstration flag in step 1703-24. Next, in step 1703-25, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets (zero clears) the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1703-26, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag and proceeds to the next processing (step 1997). It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997) also in the case of No in step 1703-10, step 1703-13, step 1703-16, or step 1703-23.

  Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3150 (sixth variation 3) in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3154, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and sends it to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1999).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output through the external relay terminal plate G according to the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the same figure (image diagram of signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal portions to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information relating to award ball payout, information relating to winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Error information for outputting various error information detected by the opening detection sensor when the door is opened, the terminal for gaming state information output for outputting information on specific gaming state, special gaming state, etc.) Output terminals and the like} are provided. As will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be capable of outputting information from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC by being connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout related information, which is information output from the winning ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a big hit at the time of a big hit (a plurality of jacks depending on the type of the big hit ), A door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a start opening winning output terminal that outputs a signal when winning at the starting opening, and a shortage of balls in the prize ball tank KT Game-related information, which is important information for game hall operators, such as a terminal for outputting a signal when the ball is out and a terminal for outputting a special symbol when outputting a signal when the special symbol is stopped. This is an output terminal. That is, the output terminal for the payout related information is set as one output terminal, so that it is possible to avoid the exhaustion of the output terminals for these important game related information.

  In the third modification from the sixth embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH send game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. It is configured to send. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment will be described. The external relay terminal board G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. I don't mean. That is, an electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is ON / OFF) by the unit, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. When the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, whereby the output terminal and the hall computer HC are brought into conduction. In addition, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected by returning the contact portion G2 to the open state. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G can be obtained by detecting the conduction period. With this configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the go-to action, but is not limited to this, for example, a pair of light emitting units and A photo sensor having a light receiving unit is also configured to enable one-way communication (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a hall computer HC). It is supplemented that the signal can be received by reading with the unit.

  However, since the structure is once replaced with a physical signal (switch state is ON / OFF), the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC with one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complex information using an input / output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, an output terminal for the number of special symbol determination times, It is customary to configure such that “only information indicating that one variation of a special symbol has ended” can be transmitted).

  Next, with reference to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 in FIG. 102, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, it is a signal of the symbol variation meter; a signal for outputting the number of symbol variations relating to the first main game and the second main game; from the first main game symbol temporary stop timing and the second main game symbol temporary stop timing; This signal continues to output the ON signal until the end of the fixed time. Note that in the third modification from the sixth embodiment, when the small winning symbol on the second main game side is won in the time-saving gaming state, that is, when the second main gaming small bonus symbol is stopped, the fluctuation occurs. Since the fixed time is longer than in other cases, the output time of the signal related to the symbol variation is also relatively long.

  Next, it is a big hit system signal; a signal that outputs that the big hit is being made (for example, that the condition device operation flag is ON) is based on the ball entering the V winning opening C26 triggered by the small hit In the case of a big hit, the timing at which the ball entering the V winning opening C26 is detected, and in the case of a big hit triggered by the stoppage of the big hit symbol, the condition device operation flag is turned off → on (the timing for starting the big hit); It is turned off after the on signal is output until it is finished (from the condition device operation flag on to off). Note that for the small hits won in the time-reduced gaming state and the small hits won in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the small hit end demo time is shorter for the small hits won in the time-reduced gaming state. Therefore, the time for outputting the external terminal signal in the small hit end demonstration time is shorter for the small hits won in the time-reduced gaming state than in the non-reduced gaming state. . In addition, the same configuration can be applied in the small hit start demo time, that is, in the small hit winning in the time shortening gaming state and the small hit winning in the non-time shortening gaming state, The small hit start demo time is shorter for the winning small hit, and the time to output the external terminal signal related to the small hit start demo time in the small hit start demo time is in the non-time-reduced gaming state. It may be configured such that the small win won in the time-saving gaming state is shorter in time than the winning small win. In addition, the same configuration can be applied to the external terminal signal indicating that the jackpot is in effect, that is, in the jackpot won in the time-saving gaming state and the jackpot won in the non-time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming The jackpot won in the state may be configured so that the output time of the external terminal signal indicating that the jackpot won in the non-time-saving gaming state is being hit is shorter. If you win a big hit in the time-saving gaming state, you are in a non-time-saving gaming state while the jackpot is running, and if you win a small hit in the time-saving gaming state, Time-saving gaming state (the time-saving gaming state is maintained). In addition, an external terminal signal related to information indicating that the game is in a time-saving game state may be output, and the external terminal signal can be output in the time-saving game state. It is configured such that it can continue to output an ON signal over “medium / small hits → time-saving game state”. As described above, the time shortening gaming state may indicate that the opening time extension function is activated, and the non-time shortening gaming state indicates that the opening time extension function is not activated. Also good.

  Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. The changes from the sixth embodiment are step 2204-1 (sixth modification 3), step 2204-2 (sixth modification 3), and step 2204-3 (sixth modification 3), that is, in step 2204. After turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-time shortened gaming state). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3), in step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the second main game side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3), in step 2204-3 (sixth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S hides the stop display and variation display of the decorative symbols. The process proceeds to step 2208. If the result is No in step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3) or step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2206. As described above, in the third modification from the sixth embodiment, in the symbol variation on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed, so that the non-time-reduced gaming state is achieved. Thus, it can be configured so that the player does not perform the right strike. Such a configuration can also be applied to other embodiments, and is suitable in the case where it is not desired to execute right-handed in a non-time-reduced gaming state or a non-probability variation gaming state.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment, whether or not the game state, the winning / failing result relating to the main gaming symbol, the symbol variation on the first main gaming side, or the second main It is configured so that the variation fixed time can be different depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the game side, etc., and an external terminal signal related to the variation fixed time can be output to appropriately output a signal outside the gaming machine Will be able to.

  Next, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board applicable to this example will be described with reference to the external terminal transmission content determination table 2 in FIG. It should be noted that the specific content of the signal shown in this example (numerical value, notification mode, treatment at the time of duplication, etc.) is merely an example, and it can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

  First, the external output signal of signal number 3 can be applied to a gaming machine that can enter a probability-variable gaming state after the end of a special game by entering a specific area C22 in the special winning opening. The second big winning opening (attacker) C20 having a specific area C22 that is a pitching area for determining whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state is short-opened (for example, maximum open time) Is a distribution game execution round, which is a round (which is 0.01 seconds), and is in a state in which the detection of entering the specific area C22 is valid, and the special electric accessory is being operated. Sometimes, the signal that outputs that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 is being executed; the second big winning opening C20 is being opened for a short time, and the detection of entering the specific area C22 is effective From the timing when the game ball enters the specific area C22 when it is in the state, the signal continues to output the ON signal for 1 second. Note that when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the distributed game execution round in which the second grand prize opening C20 is long open, the external terminal signal is not output. That is, the configuration is such that the presence / absence of the output of the external terminal signal when entering the specific area C22 differs between the long open big hit and the short open big hit. In addition, it is preferable that the external terminal signal is not output when a special game is executed once except for the first one satisfying the output timing.

  Next, the external output signal of signal number 3 can be applied to a gaming machine in which a big hit can be started after the small hit game ends by entering the V winning opening C27 in the big winning opening. An additional external terminal signal; a signal that outputs that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 during a small hit game in the non-time-reduced gaming state; From the timing when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 within the V winning opening effective period; from 0.200 seconds on to 0.200 seconds off.

Next, FIG. 105 is an example of the configuration of the electric accessory release time applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. In the same figure, the case where the big hit symbol stops or the small hit symbol stops and the big hit or small hit starts while the auxiliary game symbol changes, and then the auxiliary game symbol stops during the big hit or small hit execution. Illustrated.
(1) <When jackpot symbol stops in non-time-saving gaming state>
If the jackpot symbol is stopped in the non-time reduction game state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the non-time reduction game state is maintained even if the jackpot symbol is stopped, and the bonus game symbol is changing during the jackpot execution. When the auxiliary game symbol is hit and stops at the symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively short open (0.2 second open → closed).
(2) <When the jackpot symbol stops in the time-saving gaming state>
If the jackpot symbol stops in the time-saving game state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the jackpot symbol is stopped and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state and is changing during the jackpot execution. When the auxiliary game symbol is stopped at the winning symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively short (0.2 seconds open → closed).
(3) <When the small hit symbol stops in the non-time-saving gaming state>
If the small hit symbol is stopped in the non-time-reduced gaming state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the non-time-reduced gaming state is maintained even if the small hit symbol is stopped. When the auxiliary game symbol that is in the middle is stopped at the winning symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively short open (0.2 second open → closed).
(4) <When a small hit symbol stops in the time-saving gaming state>
If the small hit symbol is stopped in the time reduction game state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the time reduction game state is maintained even if the small hit symbol is stopped. When the auxiliary game symbol is stopped at the winning symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory is relatively long open (0.2 second open → 0.8 closed → 4 second → closed).

Next, FIG. 106 is a configuration example in the case of winning a small hit in the final variation of the time-saving gaming state according to this example. For example, when the game shifts to the time-reduced gaming state 100 times after the end of the big hit, the 100th rotation after the end of the big hit is the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state.
<Configuration 1>
In a situation where the main game short flag is on, the small hit symbol may be stopped, and the main game short flag may be turned off at the stop timing of the small hit symbol.
<Configuration 2>
In the situation where the main game short flag is on, the small hit symbol stops, and at the stop timing of the small hit symbol, the main game short flag remains on, and the small hit symbol for the small hit symbol starts, You may comprise so that a main game short time flag may turn off at the timing which a small hit game is complete | finished.

  In the gaming machine according to the present example, if the main game probability change flag is turned on and a small win is won, the main game probability change flag remains on during the small hit execution, and the main game When the big hit is won in the state where the probability change flag is on, the main game probability change flag is turned off during the big hit.

  Further, in the examples of the gaming machine according to the present example other than the first modified example from the sixth embodiment and the second modified example from the sixth embodiment, the winning prize is won with the main game short flag being on. In such a case, the main game short time flag remains on during execution of the big hit, and if the big win is won with the main game short time flag turned on, the main game short time is reduced during the big hit execution. The flag is configured to be turned off.

  Next, FIG. 107 is an example of a notice effect according to this example. As shown in the figure, in this example, there are a plurality of types of notice effects that can be executed, such as a notice effect in which a big hit is definitive, a notice effect in which a small hit is definite, and the like. In addition, there is no notice effect that denies the big hit, while there are a plurality of notice effects that deny the small hit, such as “Serif notice (rainbow)”. That is, there are more notice effects that deny a small hit than notice effects that deny a big hit.

Moreover, you may comprise as follows as a structure of the gaming machine concerning this example.
(1) By entering the specific area C22 during the special game, the game shifts to the probability variation game state after the special game ends.
(2) Of the second main game special games, the ratio of the big hits (second main game long open big hits) in which the big prize opening becomes long in the distributed game execution round is the distribution in the first main game special games It is higher than the percentage of big hits (first main game long open big hit) that the big prize opening becomes long open in the game execution round.
(3) In the non-stochastic game state and the non-time shortening game state, when a long open big hit is won and a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the long open big hit, the time reduced game after the long open big hit ends Transition to a state (or easy transition).
(4) When the long open big hit is won in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening game state, and a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the long open big hit, the non-time shortened gaming state after the end of the long open big hit (Or easy to migrate).
(4) In the case of winning the small hit on the first main game side in the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the game shifts to the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state after the end of the small winning.

M main control board,
MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 first main game timer, MP11t-C2 second main game timer MP22t-B second main game Start-up motor accessory release timer, MP33c winning ball counter MP34t special game timer, MP51c probability variation counter MP52c hour / count counter, MN52c limited frequency counter MP41t small hit game timer, MP41t-2 discharge standby timer A 1st main game periphery Device A10 first main game start opening, A11s first main game start entrance entrance detection device A20 first main game symbol display device, A21g first main game symbol display unit A21h first main game symbol hold display unit, B second Main game peripheral device B10 second main game start port, B11s second main game start port entrance detection device 11d 2nd main game start opening electric accessory, B20 2nd main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit, B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display unit C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device, C10 1st grand prize opening C11s 1st grand prize opening prize detection device, C11d 1st big prize opening electric appliance C20 2nd big prize opening, C21s 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21d 2nd big prize opening electric machine, C22 specific area C23 2nd big prize opening discharge port, C23s 2nd big prize opening discharge detection device C24 upper shielding member, C25 lower shielding member C27 V prize opening, C27s V prize opening entrance detection device C20-1 box-like member H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM21t design variation time management timer, SM26c look-ahead effect execution counter SM23c stay stage management counter, SM23c2 consecutive resort count counter SM24t power-on timer SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decoration symbol display Area, SG12 first hold display portion SG13 second hold display portion, SB sub input button SBs sub input button input detection device, KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to an open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance and be compared with a closed state A variable member that is easy to enter and configured so that a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter in a predetermined entrance when it is displaced to a closed state,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section,
The main game department
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit variably displays the first main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the first main game identification information. One main game identification information display control means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the second main game identification information. Two-main game identification information display control means;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is variable until there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening or until a predetermined period elapses. A special game in which a unit game that can make a winning opening advantageous to a player can be executed a plurality of times can be executed, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group After being displayed, a variable prize opening opening game that executes a unit game that can make the variable prize opening advantageous to the player once until there is a specific number of balls in the variable prize opening or a specific period elapses. A special game control means that is executable;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side to the sub-game unit side,
Even if the first main game identification information is variably displayed, the variable display of the second main game identification information can be started. Even if the second main game identification information is variably displayed, the first main game identification information It is configured to start variable display,
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Alternatively, the first main game identification information cannot be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second main game identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. ,
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game A high probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability;
The fluctuation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state is the fluctuation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state. Is configured to be relatively long,
The variation display period of the second main game identification information in the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state is the variation display period of the second main game identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state. Is configured to be relatively long,
When a game ball is fired at a predetermined interval toward the second starting port, it is a normal game state and a high-probability lottery state, rather than a specific game state and a high-probability lottery state. Is configured to increase the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the variable prize opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed,
When a game ball is fired at a predetermined interval toward the second starting port, it is a normal game state and a high probability lottery state, rather than a normal game state and a low probability lottery state. Is configured to increase the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the variable prize opening opening game per unit time during the period when the special game is not executed,
The subsidiary game department
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side;
Based on the information about the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information received by the game information receiving means, with the effect display content control means capable of displaying the sub game identification information on the effect display unit,
In the case of the normal game state and the low probability lottery state, when the information about the first main game identification information is received, the secondary game identification information based on the information about the first main game identification information is displayed in the effect display unit. On the other hand, in the case of the normal game state and the low probability lottery state, if information related to the second main game identification information is received, the secondary game identification based on the information related to the second main game identification information A pachinko gaming machine configured to display information in a display mode in which information is not displayed on an effect display unit or is more difficult to visually recognize than sub game identification information based on information related to first main game identification information.

Images